IBM Printer TF7 User Manual
SureMark Printers  
ꢀꢁꢂ  
DBCS User’s Guide  
updated March 18, 2002  
GA27-4256-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Contents  
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Who Should Read This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
How This Manual Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix  
Related Publications and Diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Where to Find More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Tell Us What You Think . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x  
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi  
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
Web-only Update for GA27-4256-01 (March 2002). . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
Web-only Update for GA27-4256-01 (June 2001) . . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
GA18-7710-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
GA27-4256-00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix  
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi  
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii  
Part 1. General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Printer Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Description of Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Features Used with the SureMark Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Planning Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Your Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Communication Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Temperature and Humidity Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Single-Byte Character Set (SBCS) Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Chapter 2. Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Unpacking the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Installing the SureMark Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Installing for RS-232/RS-485 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Installing for USB Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Using the Wall Mounting Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing the Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Installing Fillers for RS-232/RS-485 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Installing Fillers for USB Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
RS-232 Communication Mode Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Baud Rate Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
RS-232 Communications Protocol Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
USB Communication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
USB Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
|
|
|
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software . . . . . . 27  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
updated March 18, 2002  
Software Adjustments (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Using the 4690 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Using IBM Point-of-Sale Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Using Reference/Service Diskettes (RS-485 or RS-232 Only) . . . . . . . 28  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
DBCS Code Page Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette Code Page Download. . . . . . . 31  
|
DBCS Code Page Download – POSS for Windows (RS-485 and USB only)  
33  
DBCS User-Defined Character Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette for Updating SureMark Firmware. . . 36  
Using POSS For Windows for Updating SureMark Firmware (RS-485 and  
USB Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Using 4690 OS 4610 Utility to Update SureMark Firmware. . . . . . . . 38  
Updating 4610 Firmware Using RS-232 Attachment Cable . . . . . . . . 38  
Limitation on Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Emulating the IBM Model 3 or Model 4 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Enabling Emulation Using 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette . . . . . 39  
Enabling Emulation Using 4690 On-Line Terminal Diagnostics . . . . . . 40  
Limitations for Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Printing Saved Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Emulating an Epson Single-Station Printer (Single-Station SureMark Only) . . . 41  
Enabling Epson Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Limitations for Epson Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Changing the Printer Mode between DBCS and SBCS . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Proportional Font Conversion Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Resources on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Part 2. Models TI5 and TG5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Chapter 4. Operation (Models TI5 and TG5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Operating Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Ribbon Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Paper Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Thermal Printhead Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Chapter 5. Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TI5 and TG5 . . . . . 55  
Testing the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Offline Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Customer Receipt Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Document Insert Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Resetting the Printer - Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Part 3. Models TF7 and TM7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Chapter 6. Operation (Models TF7 and TM7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Operating Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Paper Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Thermal Printhead Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Chapter 7. Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TF7 and TM7 . . . . . 67  
Testing the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Offline Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
RS-232 Hex Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
iv SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Resetting the Printer - Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Problem Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Part 4. Appendixes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Appendix A. Consumable Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Paper Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Thermal Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Document Insert Forms (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Print Ribbons (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Appendix B. Technical Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Memory Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Voltage Conversion Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
RS-485 Serial I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Cash Drawer Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
RS-232 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
RS-232 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
USB Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Code Page Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Generic Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Code Page 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Code Page 858 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Code Page 860 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Code Page 863 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Code Page 865 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Code Page 932 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Code Page 949 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Code Page 950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Code Page 1381 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Character Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Thermal Printing Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Impact Printing Fonts (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
|
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
RS-232 Commands Summary by Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Alphabetized RS-232 Commands Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
System Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Exercise Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Verify Previous Commands Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Status Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Extended Address Command – Request Printer ID . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Preset or Onetime-Set Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Download Graphics (Logo) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Predefine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Download User-Defined Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Download Double-Byte Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Flash Storage Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Erase Flash EPROM Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Send Checksum of Flash EPROM Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Microcode Tolerance (MCT) Information - Loading . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Microcode Tolerance (MCT) Information - Request . . . . . . . . . . 123  
DBCS Address Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Set Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Set or Cancel Double-Wide Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Set or Cancel Double-High Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Set or Cancel Underline Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Set or Cancel Overline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Set or Cancel Invert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Set or Cancel Emphasized Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Set or Cancel High Quality Print Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Set Print Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Select User-Defined or Resident Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set Inter-Character Spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set Inter-Character Spacing – DBCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Set or Cancel Rotated Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Set Print Station Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Select 1/8-Inch Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Select 1/6-Inch Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Select Color Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Set Line Spacing Using Minimum Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Set Sheet Eject Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set Horizontal Tab Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set Left Margin Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set Relative Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Align Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Set or Cancel Unidirectional Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Set Error Recovery Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Define Document Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Status Sent to System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Select Character for Reprinted Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Reinitialize the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Enable or Disable the Feed Buttons (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . 138  
Enable or Disable the Beeper (Models TF7 and TM7 Only) . . . . . . . 139  
Enable or Disable Upside-Down Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Select Character Size for Scalable Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Fix Font Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Print Logo Inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Enable or Disable Two-Color Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Bar Code Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Print Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Select Horizontal Size of Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Select Bar Code Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Select Printing Position of Human Readable Information (HRI) . . . . . . 146  
Select Font for HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Print PDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Select PDF417 ECC (Error Correction Codewords) Level . . . . . . . . 147  
Select Aspect Ratio PDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Enable PDF417 Truncation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Print Character Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Print and Line Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Print and Line Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Print, Form Feed, and Cut the Paper (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Print and Feed Paper n lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Print and Feed Paper Using Minimum Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Print Graphic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Select and Print a Graphics (Logo) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
vi SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Print Predefined Graphics (Logo) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Print Predefined Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Tab to Next Tab Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Return Home (Select Printhead Location). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Paper Cut/DI Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Generate Drive Pulse for Cash Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Retrieve the Flash Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Retrieve Size of User Flash Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Retrieve Printer Usage Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Asynchronous (Real-Time) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Real-Time Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Data Buffer Management and Batch Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Reset Line Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Disable Line Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Hold Printing Until Buffer is Released . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Document Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Portrait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Landscape Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Message from the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Status Byte 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Status Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Status Byte 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Status Byte 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Status Byte 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Status Byte 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Status Byte 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Status Byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
|
Appendix D. Uploading Electronic Journal Data . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Enable the Upload of EJ Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Disable the Upload of EJ Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Upload the EJ Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Request the Size of the EJ Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Erase the EJ Data in the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164  
Appendix E. Proportional Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Preparing the Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Implementing Proportional Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Layout Using Align Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165  
Layout using Set Tab Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
Appendix F. Emulation Support for Epson Single-Station Printer . . . . 169  
Commands Supported in Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Commands with Limited Support in Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Commands Not Supported in Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Connectivity Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Appendix G. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Electronic Emission Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement . . . . . . . . 173  
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement . . . . . . . 173  
Avis de conformité aux normes d’Industrie Canada . . . . . . . . . . 173  
European Union (EU) Mark of Conformity Statement . . . . . . . . . 174  
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Statement  
175  
Contents vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Korean Communications Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Chinese Class A warning statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Taiwanese Class A Warning Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
Australia / New Zealand Compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
viii SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Preface  
This manual assists you with installing, testing, and performing problem  
determination for models TI5, TF7, and TM7 of the IBM SureMark Printer.  
Who Should Read This Manual  
This manual is intended for use by persons who are installing, testing, or  
programming a Model TI5, TF7 or TM7 IBM SureMark Printer. The manual should  
also be used for problem determination on the printer.  
How This Manual Is Organized  
Part 1 contains information that applies to SureMark printers in general:  
v Chapter 1, “Introduction” provides an overview of the features and options of the  
SureMark printers.  
v Chapter 2, “Installation Instructions” – provides information on installing the  
SureMark printers.  
v Chapter 3, “SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software” – provides  
information about using SureMark utilities to setup or modify your system  
configuration.  
Part 2 contains information that is specific to the thermal/impact SureMark printer,  
Models TI5 and TG5:  
v Chapter 4, “Operation (Models TI5 and TG5)” – provides information about the  
controls and indicators. Ribbon loading and paper loading instructions are also  
included.  
v Chapter 5, “Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TI5 and TG5” – provides  
information on testing and on problem determination.  
Part 3 contains information that is specific to the single-station SureMark printers,  
models TF7 and TM7:  
v Chapter 6, “Operation (Models TF7 and TM7)” – provides information on the  
controls and indicators. Paper loading instructions are also included.  
v Chapter 7, “Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TF7 and TM7” – provides  
information on testing and on problem determination.  
The appendixes contain the following information:  
v Appendix A, “Consumable Supplies” – information about consumable supplies.  
v Appendix B, “Technical Information” – information about technical specifications.  
v Appendix C, “RS-232 Programming Information” – information about RS-232  
programming commands.  
v Appendix D, “Uploading Electronic Journal Data” – information about uploading  
electronic journal data while the SureMark is in Model 4 emulation mode.  
v Appendix E, “Proportional Fonts” – information about creating and using  
proportional fonts.  
v Appendix F, “Emulation Support for Epson Single-Station Printer” – expanded  
information about Epson emulation mode.  
v Appendix G, “Notices” – information about trademarks and electronic emission  
notices  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Related Publications and Diskettes  
v IBM SureMark Printers: DBCS Hardware Service Manual, GY27-0397  
v IBM SureMark Printers: DBCS Installation Utilities Diskette  
v IBM 4693 Point-of-Sale Terminals Reference Diskette  
v IBM 4694/4695 Point-of-Sale Terminals Service Diskette  
v IBM Safety Information – Read This First, GA27-4004  
v IBM SurePOS 700 Series: System Reference, SA27-4220  
v IBM SurePOS 500 Series: System Reference, SA27-4255  
v POSS Programming Reference and User’s Guide, SC30-3560  
The diskettes are only available by download from the Internet. See “Resources on  
the Internet” on page 43 for more information.  
For information about ordering IBM publications that are not shipped with the  
SureMark printers, contact your IBM representative or your place of purchase.  
Where to Find More Information  
A CD-ROM is available that contains books that are part of the IBM Retail Store  
Solutions Library Collection, SK2T-0331.  
Current versions of Retail Store Solutions documentation and downloadable  
diskettes are available on the IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site. See “Resources  
on the Internet” on page 43 for information about accessing the site.  
Tell Us What You Think  
Your feedback is important in helping to provide the most accurate and high-quality  
information. Please take a few moments to tell us what you think about this book.  
The only way for us to know if you are satisfied with our books, or how we might  
improve their quality, is through feedback from customers like you. If you have any  
comments about this book, there is a comment form at the back of this book. You  
can also get a copy of the form from the PDF version of the book on the Web.  
To access a PDF version of this book, visit the Retail Store Solutions Web site at:  
http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/store  
From there, select Support at the left, then select Publications.  
After you have filled out the form, return it by mail, by fax, or by giving it to an IBM  
representative. If applicable, include a reference to the specific location of the text  
on which you are commenting. For instance, include the page or table number.  
Between major revisions of this manual we may make minor technical updates. The  
latest softcopy version of this manual is available under Publications on the IBM  
Retail Store Solutions Web site.  
x
SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Safety Information  
Danger:  
Before you begin to install this product, read the safety information in IBM  
Safety Information - Read This First, GA27-4004. This booklet describes safe  
procedures for cabling and plugging in electrical equipment.  
Gevaar:  
Voordat u begint met de installatie van dit produkt, moet u eerst de  
veiligheidsinstructies lezen in de brochure Veiligheidsinstructies—Lees dit  
eerst, GA27-4004. Hierin wordt beschreven hoe u electrische apparatuur op  
een veilige manier moet bekabelen en aansluiten.  
Preface xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Perigo:  
Antes de começar a instalar este produto, leia as informações de segurança  
contidas em Informações Sobre Seguranaça—Leia Isto Primeiro, GA27-4004.  
Esse folheto descreve procedimentos de segurança para a instalação de  
cabos e conexões em equipamentos elétricos.  
Fare!  
Før du installerer dette produkt, skal du lse sikkerhedsforskrifterne i  
Sikkerhedsforskrifter—Lœs dette fø rst GA27-4004. Vejledningen beskriver  
den fremgangsmåde, du skal bruge ved tilslutning af kabler og udstyr.  
Gevaar  
Voordat u begint met het installeren van dit produkt, dient u eerst de  
veiligheidsrichtlijnen te lezen die zijn vermeld in de publikatie IBM Safety  
Information - Read This First, GA27-4004. In dit boekje vindt u veilige  
procedures voor het aansluiten van elektrische appratuur.  
VAARA  
Ennen kuin aloitat tämän tuotteen asennuksen, lue julkaisussa  
Turvaohjeet—Luetämä ensin, GA27-4004, olevat turvaohjeet. Tässä kirjasessa  
on ohjeet siitä, miten sä hkölaitteet kaapeloidaan ja kytketään turvallisesti.  
xii SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Danger  
Avant d’installer le présent produit, consultez le livret Informations pour la  
sécurité–Lisez-moi d’ abord, GA27-4004, qui dé crit les procédures à  
respecter pour effectuer les opérations de câ blage et brancher les  
équipements électriques en toute sécurité.  
Vorsicht  
Bevor mit der Installation des Produktes begonnen wird, die  
Sicherheitshinweise in Sicherheitsinformationen—Bitte zuerst lesen, IBM Form  
GA27-4004. Diese Veröffentlichung beschreibt die Sicherheitsvorkehrungen für  
das Verkabeln und Anschlieβen elektrischer Geräte.  
Vigyázat  
Mielôtt megkezdi a berendezés üzembe helyezését, olvassa el a IBM Safety  
Information — Read This First, GA27–4004 kö nyvecskében leírt biztonsági  
informá ciókat. Ez a kö nyv leírja, milyen biztonsági intézkedéseket kell  
megtenni az elektromos berendezés huzalozásakor illetve csatlakoztatásakor.  
Pericolo  
prima di iniziare l’installazione di questo prodotto, leggere le informazioni  
relative alla sicurezza riportate nell’opuscolo Informazioni di sicurezza—Prime  
informazioni da leggere in cui sono descritte le procedure per il cablaggio ed il  
collegamento di apparecchiature elettriche.  
Preface xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Fare  
Før du begynner å installere dette produktet, må du lese  
sikkerhetsinformasjonen i Sikkerhetsinformasjon—Les dette fø rst, GA27–4004  
som beskriver sikkerhetsrutinene for kabling og tilkobling av elektrisk utstyr.  
Perigo  
Antes de iniciar a instalação deste produto, leia as informações de segurança  
Informações de Segurança—Leia Primeiro, GA27–4004. Este documento  
descreve como efectuar, de um modo seguro, as ligações eléctricas dos  
equipamentos.  
Peligro  
Antes de empezar a instalar este producto, lea la información de seguridad en  
Información de Seguridad—Lea Esto Primero, GA27–4004. Este documento  
describe los procedimientos de sequridad para cablear y enchufar equipos  
eléctricos.  
xiv SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Varning—livsfara  
Innan du börjar installera den här produkten bör du läsa sä  
kerhetsinformationen i dikumentet Säkerhetsföreskrifter—Läs detta fö rst,  
GA27–4004. Där beskrivs hur du på ett säkert sätt ansluter elektrisk  
utrustning.  
Preface xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
IBM  
IBM  
GA27-4004  
GA27-4004  
xvi SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Preface xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
xviii SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Summary of Changes  
This section summarizes the changes included in the latest editions of this manual.  
Web-only Update for GA27-4256-01 (March 2002)  
This update contains updates to the paper loading procedure for models TM6 and  
TF6. See “Paper Loading” on page 63.  
Web-only Update for GA27-4256-01 (June 2001)  
This edition includes the updates for the TG5 model.  
GA18-7710-01  
This edition includes information for the support of a USB logic card.  
Information that was added includes:  
v “USB Connector Pin Assignments” on page 81.  
v USB information has been added to “Voltage Conversion Circuitry” on page 79  
and “Hardware Requirements” on page 8.  
v The part number for the available USB cables has been added to “Features  
Used with the SureMark Printers” on page 5.  
v Information about your responsibilities when using USB communications has  
been added to “Planning Information” on page 5.  
v The data rate for USB communications has been added to “Communication  
Interfaces” on page 6.  
v Information about installing the SureMark printer for use with USB  
communications has been added to “Installing for USB Communication” on  
page 15.  
v Information about installing fillers for the SureMark printer when using USB  
communications has been added to “Installing Fillers for USB Printers” on  
page 21.  
v Communication mode information for USB has been added to “USB  
Communication Mode” on page 25.  
v Relevant information for performing problem determination with USB has been  
added to Table 6 on page 59.  
GA27-4256-00  
This edition includes information for the support of the new single-station SureMark  
printers, which are models TF7 and TM7, and also information about new functions  
and commands for Model TI5. Changed or new information is indicated by a  
revision bar (|) in the left margin. (There are no revision bars in the margin of  
figures. Refer to “Figures” on page xxi for revision bars that show which figures  
have been changed.)  
Changes for this edition include:  
v Because there are important differences between models TF7 and TM7, which  
are single-station SureMark printers, and the Model TI5 thermal/impact SureMark  
printer, the book has been reorganized into three parts.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xix  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
– Part 1, “General Information” on page 1 contains information that is similar for  
all SureMark models. Information about the new single-station printers has  
been added throughout this part.  
– Part 2, “Models TI5 and TG5” on page 45 contains information that is specific  
to the Model TI5 thermal/impact SureMark printer.  
– Part 3, “Models TF7 and TM7” on page 61 contains information that is specific  
to the new single-station SureMark printers – models TF7 and TM7.  
v A new thermal font has been added. See “Set Print Mode” on page 125 and  
“Thermal Printing Font” on page 93.  
v Support for emulation of an Epson single-station printer has been added.  
(Emulation is only available when the SureMark is in SBCS mode.) See  
“Emulating an Epson Single-Station Printer (Single-Station SureMark Only)” on  
page 41 for information about how to enable emulation and an overview of the  
limitations to using emulation mode. See Appendix F, “Emulation Support for  
Epson Single-Station Printer” on page 169 for detailed information about what  
Epson commands are supported in emulation mode.  
v A font conversion utility has been added as part of the support for proportional  
fonts. See “Proportional Font Conversion Utility” on page 43.  
v Information about uploading electronic journal data while the printer is emulating  
a Model 4 printer has been added. See Appendix D, “Uploading Electronic  
Journal Data” on page 163.  
v The following commands have been added:  
– “Proportional Font” on page 114  
– “Select Color Printing” on page 132  
– n=09 (Align Column Right) for “Align Positions” on page 134  
– “Enable or Disable Upside-Down Printing” on page 139  
– “Select Character Size for Scalable Fonts” on page 140  
– “Fix Font Matrix” on page 141  
– “Print Logo Inline” on page 141  
– “Enable or Disable Two-Color Printing” on page 141  
– n=09 (Code 128A, 128B, and 128C) for “Print Bar Code” on page 142  
v The following command, which is supported only on models TF7 and TM7, has  
been added:  
– “Enable or Disable the Beeper (Models TF7 and TM7 Only)” on page 138  
xx SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Figures  
1. IBM SureMark Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
2. SureMark Printer Dimensions – Models TI5 and TG5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
3. SureMark Printer Dimensions – Models TF7 and TM7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
4. Cable Connectors and RS-232 Settings Switch for Thermal/Impact SureMark Printers . . . . . 12  
5. Cable Connectors for Single-Station SureMark Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
6. RS-232 Mode Switches for Single-Station SureMark Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
7. RS-232 and RS-485 Cable Routing for Single-Station SureMark Printers . . . . . . . . . . 14  
|
|
|
8. USB Ports for Thermal/Impact SureMark Printers (View is from the bottom rear of the printer)  
15  
9. USB Ports for Single-Station SureMark Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
10. USB Cable Routing for Single-Station SureMark Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
11. Mounting a Single-Station SureMark on a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
12. Installing the Fillers for RS-232/RS-485 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
13. Installing the Fillers for USB Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
14. Adjustment and Alignment Printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
15. Switch for Epson Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
16. SureMark Printer - Indicators, Controls, and Printing Stations (Models TI5 and TG5) . . . . . . 47  
17. Inserting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
18. Printable Area of an Inserted Document (Portrait) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
19. Printable Area of an Inserted Document (Landscape) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
20. Opening the Ribbon Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
21. Ribbon Cartridge Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
22. Ribbon Path around the Printhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
23. Paper Cover – Models TI5 and TG5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
24. Paper Loading Path –: Models TI5 and TG5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
25. Printhead and Print Line Area – Models TI5 and TG5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
26. Offline Printer Test Pattern – Customer Receipt Station (Models TI5 and TG5) . . . . . . . . 57  
27. SureMark Printer - Indicator, Control, and Printing Station (Models TF7 and TM7) . . . . . . . 63  
28. Paper Loading Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
29. Paper Loading Path (Models TF7 and TM7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
30. Printhead and Print Line Area (Models TF7 and TM7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
31. Offline Printer Test Pattern – Models TF7 and TM7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
32. Printer’s Resident Character Set - Generic Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
33. Code Page 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
34. Code Page 858 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
35. Code Page 860 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
36. Code Page 863 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
37. Code Page 865 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
38. Code Page 932 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
39. Code Page 949 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
40. Code Page 950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
41. Code Page 1381 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
42. Proportional Font Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
|
|
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxi  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
xxii SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Tables  
1. Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
2. Adjustment Procedures Using 4690 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
3. Adjustment Procedures Using the Point-of-Sale Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
4. Font Files for DBCS Code Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
5. UDC Font File Names for DBCS Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
6. Troubleshooting – Models TI5 and TG5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
7. Troubleshooting – Models TF7 and TM7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
8. Station Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
9. Sound Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
10. 9-pin to 9-pin RS-232 Connector Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
11. 25-pin to 25-pin RS-232 Connector Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
12. RS-232 Commands Organized by Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
13. RS-232 Commands in Alphabetical Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
14. Address Ranges for DBCS Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
15. MCT Command Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
16. Fonts for Models TI5, TG5, TF7, and TM7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
17. Width and Height for Scalable Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
18. Code 128 character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
19. Retrievable Usage Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
20. Commands Supported in Epson Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
21. Commands with Limited Support in Epson Emulation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
22. Commands Not Supported in Epson Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
|
|
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxiii  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
xxiv SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Part 1. General Information  
This part contains descriptions of the SureMark printers that support DBCS mode  
and information about installing the printers.  
The following table shows the warranty information for each printer model.  
Table 1. Warranty Information  
Machine type  
Description  
Warranty  
service  
Warranty  
upgrade  
4610-TI3  
Attaches to the IBM 4694/4800.  
RS232, RS485, USB (Pearl white  
covers)  
IOR 24x7  
IOR 24x7  
IOR 24x7  
IOR 24x7  
IOR 24x7  
none  
none  
none  
none  
none  
4610-TI4  
Attaches to the IBM 4694/4800.  
RS232, RS485, USB (Pearl white  
covers)  
4610-TI5 (DBCS Attaches to the IBM 4694/4800.  
– AP only)  
RS232, RS485, USB (Pearl white  
covers)  
4610-TM6  
Attaches to the IBM 4694/4800.  
RS232, RS485, USB (Pearl white  
covers)  
4610-TM7  
(DBCS – AP  
only)  
Attaches to the IBM 4694/4800.  
RS232, RS485, USB (Pearl white  
covers)  
4610-TF6  
4610-TF7  
4610-IF6  
TM6 with iron gray covers to match Depot repair  
4840  
IOR 24x7 IOR  
9x5  
TM7 with iron gray covers to match Depot repair  
4840  
IOR 24x7, IOR  
9x5  
Functionally equivalent to TF6 with  
iron gray covers but with IOR  
warranty  
IOR 24x7  
none  
none  
none  
none  
4610-TG3  
4610-TG4  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI3 IOR 24x7  
with iron gray covers to match the  
IBM 4840  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI4 IOR 24x7  
with iron gray covers to match the  
IBM 4840  
4610-TG5  
(DBCS – AP  
only)  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI5 IOR 24x7  
with iron gray covers to match the  
IBM 4840  
4610-DG3  
4610-DG4  
4610-DI3  
4610-DI4  
4610-DM6  
Functionally equivalent to Model  
TG3 but with Depot warranty  
Depot repair  
IOR 24x7, 9x5  
IOR 24x7, 9x5  
IOR 24x7, 9x5  
IOR 24x7, 9x5  
IOR 24x7, 9x5  
Functionally equivalent to Model  
TG4 but with Depot warranty  
Depot repair  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI3 Depot repair  
but with Depot warranty  
Functionally equivalent to Model TI4 Depot repair  
but with Depot warranty  
Functionally equivalent to Model  
TM6 but with Depot warranty  
Depot repair  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Note: IOR 24x7 is IBM onsite repair 24 hours times seven days per week. 9x5 is  
nine hours per day for five days per week.  
2
SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
Printer Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Description of Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
Features Used with the SureMark Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Planning Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Your Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Communication Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Temperature and Humidity Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Models TI5 and TG5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Models TF7 and TM7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Operating System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Application Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Single-Byte Character Set (SBCS) Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) Code Pages . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Printer Overview  
Figure 1. IBM SureMark Printers  
The IBM SureMark printers are high-performance, high-function printers. The  
SureMark is available in several models:  
v Models TI5 and TG5 feature a thermal customer receipt station and an impact  
document insert station. The dual printheads enable quiet, fast printing at the  
customer receipt station while providing the capability to print and frank checks  
and to print multipart forms through the document insert station.  
v Models TF7 and TM7 are single-station thermal printers. They contain no  
document insert station. These models cost less, weigh less, and have a smaller  
footprint than the Models TI5 and TG5 printer. Models TF7 and TM7 have been  
designed for wall mounting, if desired by the retailer.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
 
updated March 18, 2002  
All SureMark printers provide:  
v Fast, quiet receipt printing  
v Easy paper loading  
v 2-MB flash memory for storing messages, logos, code pages, and double-byte  
character sets  
v Bar code generation  
v Downloadable fonts and code pages  
v Downloadable microcode  
v Small footprint  
v Support for RS-232 (EIA 232) and RS-485 (EIA 485) interfaces  
The single-station SureMark printers, and also SureMark Models TI5 and TG5  
printers that have been updated with the latest firmware, support the following in the  
thermal station:  
v Proportional fonts (SBCS only)  
v Scalable fonts  
v Color printing – black plus one accent on two-color thermal paper (thermal  
station only)  
v Upside-down printing  
Additional features of some SureMark models include:  
v Support for USB interface (models TI5, TG5, and TM7)  
v Easy-to-load ribbon cartridge (Models TI5 and TG5)  
v Epson emulation (models TF7 and TM7, SBCS only)  
Description of Models  
SureMark printers are available in the following models that can operate in either  
single-byte character set (SBCS) mode or double-byte character set (DBCS) mode:  
|
|
|
|
Models TI5 and TG5  
Standard models that supports receipt and document printing. Model TG5 is  
equivalent to Model TI5 but with iron gray covers to match the IBM 4840  
system units.  
Models TF7 and TM7  
Smaller models that contain only a thermal customer receipt station.  
Because there is no document insert station, these models do not support  
document printing.  
Models TF7 and TM7 have an audible alarm, a spill-resistant design, and  
an optional wall mount.  
For Food Service customers, the covers on Model TF7 match the IBM  
SurePOS 500 Series systems. For Retail customers, the covers on Model  
TM7 match the IBM 4694 systems if the RS-232/RS-485 interface is  
ordered, and match the IBM SurePOS 700 Series systems if the USB  
interface is ordered.  
When any of these printers operates in DBCS mode, you can use one of the  
following character sets (characters must be downloaded to the printer from the  
Utility Diskette or using POSS for Windows):  
v Japanese  
v Korean  
v Traditional Chinese  
v Simplified Chinese  
4
SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Note: IOR 24x7 is IBM onsite repair 24 hours times seven days per week. 9x5 is  
nine hours per day for five days per week.  
Features Used with the SureMark Printers  
All models support the following features:  
v Integration Panel  
v 40-Character VFD Post Extension  
v Distributed Printer Cable (RS-485)  
v Integrated Cable (RS-485)  
v Short RS-232 Communications Cable, 2 m (about 6.6 ft), P/N 86H2192  
v Long RS-232 Communications Cable, 4 m (about 13.1 ft), P/N 86H2195  
v Power Supply (RS-232 and USB), P/N 42H1176  
v Power Cords (country-specific)  
|
|
v RS-232/RS-485 Interface Card  
Models TI5, TG5, and TM7 support the following features:  
v USB Cable — Powered, 0.5 m (about 1.6 ft), P/N 01L1646  
v USB Cable — Powered, 3.8 m (about 12.5 ft), P/N 01L647  
v USB Cable — Standard, 5.0 m (about 16.4 ft), P/N 08L2014  
v USB Interface Card  
|
Because a cash drawer can attach directly to the SureMark, all models also support  
the following features:  
v Compact Cash Drawer - Vertical Till  
v Compact Cash Drawer - Horizontal Till  
v Full-size Cash Drawer - Adjustable Till  
v Full-size Cash Drawer - Fixed Till Insert  
v Short Cash Drawer Cable, P/N 72H3802  
v Long Cash Drawer Cable, P/N 72H3803  
Planning Information  
Your Responsibilities  
You are responsible for replenishing consumable supplies, including roll paper for  
the thermal (customer receipt station) printer, and, depending on your model, forms  
and ribbon cartridges for the impact (document insert) station. (See Appendix A,  
“Consumable Supplies”.)  
The customer must load the appropriate DBCS fonts in the printer.  
If you plan to use RS-232 communications, you are responsible for ordering a 24 V  
dc power supply with a power cord. You are also responsible for ordering the  
RS-232 cable.  
Note: If a 3-wire RS-232 cable is to be used, the printer must be set to XON/XOFF  
mode. (See “RS-232 Communications Protocol Selection” on page 23.)  
|
|
It is the customers responsibilities to update printer firmware as needed prior to  
installing printers and as desired during the printer’s life.  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
If you plan to use RS-485 communications, you are responsible for ordering the  
RS-485 cable.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you plan to use USB communications, you are responsible for ordering one of the  
following:  
v A powered USB cable, P/N 08L2014.  
v A standard USB cable with a Type B connector for the printer, and a power brick.  
The 3.8-m USB cable for a distributed configuration is P/N 01L1647 and the  
0.5-m USB cable for an integrated configuration is P/N 01L1646.  
SureMark printers have no physical journal station. You must use an  
electronic journaling application instead. Electronic journaling eliminates the  
need to store paper journal tapes and the time-consuming task of searching papers  
should the need arise.  
Limitations  
SureMark printers have a safety feature that slows printing if excessive duty cycles  
are used. This feature protects the printer hardware from potential damage and  
should not be noticeable during normal operation.  
Communication Interfaces  
All SureMark printers can support the RS-232 and RS-485 interfaces. Models TI5,  
TG5, and TM7 can also support the USB interface. For SureMark models that can  
support the USB interface, you can upgrade installed printers from RS-232/RS-485  
to USB by ordering a USB interface card.  
RS-232 supports 9600 and 19 200 baud rates. RS-485 operates at a 187.5K baud  
rate. USB supports data rates up to 12 Mbps.  
6
SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Temperature and Humidity Limits  
Shipping  
-40° to 60° C (-40° to 140° F) with 5% to 100% relative humidity  
including condensation, but excluding rain  
Storage  
0 to 60° C (32 to 140° F)  
Operating  
0 to 40° C (32 to 104° F) with 8 to 80% relative humidity  
To allow convection cooling, ventilation holes in the covers must not be blocked.  
Physical Dimensions  
Models TI5 and TG5  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Weight  
190.5 mm (7.5 in.)  
255 mm (10 in.)  
Front: 140 mm (5.5 in.), Rear: 190 mm (7.5 in.)  
4.4 kg (9.6 lb)  
Figure 2. SureMark Printer Dimensions – Models TI5 and TG5  
Models TF7 and TM7  
Width  
Depth  
Height  
Weight  
145 mm (5.7 in.)  
177 mm (7.0 in.)  
Front: 95 mm (3.7 in.), Rear: 121 mm (4.8 in.)  
1.4 kg (3.0 lb) without paper  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Figure 3. SureMark Printer Dimensions – Models TF7 and TM7  
Power Requirements  
The SureMark printers do not contain a power supply. When the printer is operating  
in RS-232 mode, an external power supply must be attached to connector J2 of the  
interface card of the printer. This connector is located under the printer and is  
accessible without removing the printer covers. (See Figure 4 on page 12 for  
thermal/impact SureMark printers, and Figure 5 on page 13 for single-station  
SureMark printers.) Connector J2 has the following pin functions:  
Pin  
1
2
Signal  
+24 V dc  
Not Connected  
Ground  
3
When the SureMark printer is operating in RS-485 mode, power is supplied to the  
printer from the IBM POS system. The system supplies 5V, 24 V, or 38 V dc to the  
printer.  
|
|
When the SureMark printer has the USB feature installed and is using the powered  
USB cable, 24V is supplied from the system unit.  
|
|
When the SureMark printer has the USB feature installed and is using a 4-wire  
cable with a Type B connector, you must use an external power brick (+24V dc).  
Hardware Requirements  
The SureMark printers work with the following systems:  
v IBM 4694 systems (both SBCS and DBCS models)  
v 4614 (RS-232 connection only with power supply)  
v IBM 4695 systems (RS-232 connection only and with power supply)  
8
SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
v PC or other store controller with an RS-232 or USB port  
v SurePOS 700 Series systems (USB connection only)  
v SurePOS 500 Series systems (RS-232 connection only)  
|
Software Requirements  
Operating System Requirements  
When using the RS-485 interface, attach SureMark printers to systems that are  
running one of these operating systems:  
v IBM PC DOS 2000 or later with POSS for DOS V1.60(c) or later  
v Windows Version 3.1 or later with POSS for Windows V1.43 or later  
v Windows NT Version 3.51 or later with POSS for Windows V1.43 or later  
v Windows 95/98 with POSS for Windows V1.43 or later  
v 4690 OS V2R4, when available  
|
|
|
|
When using the USB interface, attach SureMark printers to systems that are  
running one of these operating systems:  
v Windows 98, 2nd Edition with POSS for Windows V2.00 or later  
v Windows 2000 Professional with POSS for Windows V2.00 or later  
When using the RS-232 or RS-485 interface, you can use OLE for Retail POS  
(OPOS) V1.4.0 with the following operating systems, if POSS for Windows V1.43 or  
later is first installed:  
v Windows 95  
v Windows NT 4.0  
POSS drivers can be downloaded from the Retail Store Solutions Web site. See  
“Resources on the Internet” on page 43 for more information.  
If you use the RS-485 interface, you must use POSS or 4690 OS drivers. If you use  
the RS-232 interface, use the commands described in Appendix C, “RS-232  
Programming Information” on page 97.  
Application Requirements  
Many IBM retail applications run on the 4690 OS in single-byte mode. The  
applications can be modified to run in double-byte mode with customer  
engagement.  
Customers must be at these application levels (or higher) when running the 4690  
OS:  
Application Name  
Product  
Number  
Maintenance  
Level  
IBM SUREPOS Application Client/Server Environment 5745-C44  
for 4690 OS  
N/A  
IBM 4680 Chain Drug Sales Application  
IBM 4680-4690 General Sales Application  
IBM 4680-4690 Supermarket Application  
5669-212  
5696-546  
5696-536  
9201  
9701  
9701  
Single-Byte Character Set (SBCS) Code Pages  
These SBCS code pages are resident in the printer:  
v Generic  
v 437 (US)  
v 858 (International)  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
v 860 (Portuguese)  
v 863 (Canadian French)  
v 865 (Norwegian)  
When you download a DBCS code page, the SBCS code page of the character set  
is downloaded as user-defined code page 1. Additional code pages (three thermal  
and one impact) can be downloaded, if desired, using the 4610 DBCS Installation  
Utility Diskette. The diskette is available on the Web. See “Resources on the  
Internet” on page 43 for more information.  
Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) Code Pages  
The following DBCS code pages are available for downloading to Models TI5, TG5,  
TF7, and TM7 of the SureMark printer:  
v 932 (Japanese  
v 949 (Korean)  
v 950 (Traditional Chinese)  
v 1381 (Simplified Chinese)  
Use the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette to download the code pages. The  
diskette is available on the Web. See “Resources on the Internet” on page 43 for  
more information.  
When you download a DBCS code page, the SBCS code page of the character set  
is downloaded as user-defined code page 1.  
All character sets cannot be resident simultaneously.  
Bar Codes  
SureMark printers can generate these bar codes:  
v UPC-A  
v UPC-E  
v JAN13 (EAN-13)  
v JAN8 (EAN-8)  
v Code 39  
v ITF  
v Codabar  
v Code 128C  
v Codes 128A, 128B, and 128C (requires latest firmware for Models TI5 and TG5)  
v Code 93  
v PDF 417  
10 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Chapter 2. Installation Instructions  
Unpacking the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Installing the SureMark Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Installing for RS-232/RS-485 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Installing for USB Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Using the Wall Mounting Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Installing the Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Installing Fillers for RS-232/RS-485 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Installing Fillers for USB Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
RS-232 Communication Mode Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Baud Rate Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
RS-232 Communications Protocol Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
DTR/DSR Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
XON/XOFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
USB Communication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
USB Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
|
|
|
Before installing a SureMark printer, be sure to read “Electronic Emission Notices”  
on page 173.  
DANGER  
To avoid a shock hazard, do not connect or disconnect any cables  
or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this  
product during an electrical storm.  
DANGER  
To avoid shock hazard:  
The power cord must be connected to a properly wired and  
earthed receptacle.  
Any equipment to which this product will be attached must also  
be connected to properly wired receptacles.  
Note: For translations of these safety notices, see IBM Safety Information – Read  
This First, GA27–4004.  
Unpacking the Printer  
Note: Save all packing material and shipping containers.  
1. Remove the SureMark printer from the shipping container and place it on a flat  
surface.  
2. Open any shipping containers of additional options and accessories to install  
with the SureMark printer.  
3. Carefully remove any remaining packing material and packing tape.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Installing the SureMark Printers  
Installing for RS-232/RS-485 Communication  
1. Power the system off and disconnect the RS-232 power supply.  
2. Locate the rear cable connectors.  
3. If you are using the RS-232 communication port:  
a. Check the settings on the RS-232 mode switch, which is near the rear  
cable connections. (See Figure 4.) See “RS-232 Communication Mode  
Selections” on page 23 for information on switch settings.  
Note: If the RS-232 communication cable has only 3 wires or if the system  
output is 3 pins (2 signals and a ground), you must use XON/XOFF  
mode.  
b. Connect the power supply to the printer.  
4. Connect the RS-485 or RS-232 communication cable to the correct port.  
Cash  
Drawer Port (RS 232  
Port Only)  
Power Supply RS 232  
RS 232  
Mode  
Switch  
RS 485 Port  
Port  
Figure 4. Cable Connectors and RS-232 Settings Switch for Thermal/Impact SureMark Printers. (View is from the  
bottom rear of the printer.)  
12 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Power supply port (RS-232 only)  
RS-232 port  
RS-485 port  
Cash drawer connector  
Figure 5. Cable Connectors for Single-Station SureMark Printers. (View is from the bottom rear of the printer)  
RS-232 mode switches  
Cash drawer connector  
Figure 6. RS-232 Mode Switches for Single-Station SureMark Printers. (View is from the bottom rear of the printer)  
5. For single-station printers, route any power cord and cables as shown in  
Figure 7 on page 14.  
Chapter 2. Installation Instructions 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Cash drawer cable  
Power cord  
Cash drawer cable  
RS-485 cable  
RS-232 cable  
Figure 7. RS-232 and RS-485 Cable Routing for Single-Station SureMark Printers  
6. Connect any other signal cables for I/O devices to the correct ports.  
7. Check that all signal cables are installed and seated in the correct ports.  
8. If you are installing the printer on an integrated unit:  
a. Pull out the locking lever at the left side of the system unit. (wide systems  
only)  
b. For single-station printers, place the printer in the square-shaped filler  
panel.  
c. Route the keyboard cable to the side of the tab as shown in Figure 12 on  
page 20.  
d. Route all cables attached to the printer through the center opening of the  
system unit and place the printer (with its filler panel, if it is a single-station  
printer) on the system unit.  
e. If you have fillers to install, go to “Installing the Fillers” on page 19.  
f. Lift the system unit rear cover and attach any cables from the printer to the  
system unit. (If this is a RS-232-attached printer, reattach the brick power  
cord if you had to detach it to route it through the center opening.)  
9. Power on the printer by either:  
v Connecting the brick power supply cable to a properly wired and grounded  
power source and powering it on  
v Powering on the POS system unit for an RS-485-attached printer.  
Note: Both voltage sources should not be connected to the printer at the  
same time, even if one of the sources is powered off. Potential  
system damage could occur under these conditions.  
10. For single-station SureMark printers, turn on the power on/off switch on the  
printer.  
14 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
11. For thermal/impact printers, locate the ribbon cartridge and install it in the  
printer. (See “Ribbon Loading” on page 49.) Be sure that the ribbon is routed  
through the printhead correctly.  
12. Load the paper roll into the printer. See “Paper Loading” on page 51 for  
thermal/impact SureMark printers or “Paper Loading” on page 63 for  
single-station SureMark printers.  
13. Installation is now complete. Go to Chapter 5, “Testing and Problem Analysis –  
Models TI5 and TG5” on page 55 for thermal/impact printers or Chapter 7,  
“Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TF7 and TM7” on page 67 for  
single-station printers and run the offline tests.  
| Installing for USB Communication  
|
1. Disconnect the power brick from the printer, if one is connected.  
|
|
2. Locate the rear cable connectors.  
Standard  
USB Port  
Cash  
Drawer Supply  
Port Port  
Power  
Powered  
USB Port  
Figure 8. USB Ports for Thermal/Impact SureMark Printers (View is from the bottom rear of the printer)  
Chapter 2. Installation Instructions 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
|
Power supply port  
Powered USB port  
Standard USB port  
Cash drawer connector  
|
|
|
|
Figure 9. USB Ports for Single-Station SureMark Printers. (View is from the bottom rear of  
the printer)  
|
|
|
|
3. For single-station printers, route any power cord and cables as shown in  
Figure 10.  
Cash drawer cable  
Standard USB cable  
Power cord  
Cash drawer cable  
Powered USB cable  
|
|
Figure 10. USB Cable Routing for Single-Station SureMark Printers  
|
|
4. Connect the USB communication cable to the correct port.  
5. Connect any other signal cables for I/O devices to the correct ports.  
|
16 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
|
|
6. Check that all signal cables are installed and seated in the correct ports.  
7. If you are installing the printer on an integrated SurePOS 700 Series system:  
|
|
a. For single-station printers, place the printer in the square-shaped filler  
panel.  
|
|
|
b. Route all cables attached to the printer through a rear opening of the  
system unit and place the printer (with its filler panel, if it is a single-station  
printer) on the system unit.  
|
|
c. Make the side of the printer overlap the tab on the side of the system unit.  
(wide systems only)  
|
|
d. If you have additional fillers to install, go to “Installing the Fillers” on  
page 19.  
|
|
|
|
e. If a fence or I/O tray is installed, lift the system unit rear cover and attach  
any cables from the printer to the system unit. (If a power brick was  
disconnected at the beginning of the installation or is needed because a  
standard USB cable is being used, attach the power brick.)  
|
|
|
8. If you are using a power brick, power on the printer by connecting the power  
brick supply cable to a properly wired and grounded power source and  
powering it on.  
|
|
9. For single-station SureMark printers, turn on the power on/off switch on the  
printer.  
|
|
|
10. For thermal/impact printers, locate the ribbon cartridge and install it in the  
printer. (See “Ribbon Loading” on page 49.) Be sure that the ribbon is routed  
through the printhead correctly.  
|
|
|
11. Load the paper roll into the printer. See “Paper Loading” on page 51 for  
thermal/impact SureMark printers or “Paper Loading” on page 63 for  
single-station SureMark printers.  
|
|
|
|
12. Installation is now complete. Go to Chapter 5, “Testing and Problem Analysis –  
Models TI5 and TG5” on page 55 for thermal/impact printers or Chapter 7,  
“Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TF7 and TM7” on page 67 for  
single-station printers and run the offline tests.  
Chapter 2. Installation Instructions 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Using the Wall Mounting Feature  
Because of their light weight and small footprint, the single-station SureMark  
printers can be mounted on a wall. This is a useful feature when counter space is  
limited.  
To use the printer with the wall mounting feature:  
1. Position the mounting bracket on a wall that has no dangerous objects, such as  
electrical wires or pipes, hidden beneath the wall surface.  
Note: Position the bracket so that the installed printer will not extend more than  
10 cm (4 in.) into a walk, hall, corridor, passageway or aisle.  
2. Attach the bracket securely to the wall with four 6-mm (0.25-in.) screws. The  
screws are not provided. You should use fasteners that are suitable for the type  
of wall construction, such that the bracket is securely attached to the wall. For  
walls that are constructed of gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs, use  
four good-quality medium-capacity or high-capacity hollow-wall anchors.  
3. Route the communication cable up the wall surface or through the bracket.  
4. Connect the cables to the printer.  
5. Place the SureMark printer on the two bracket posts. Slide the printer down until  
a click sounds.  
Wall bracket  
Mounting posts  
Screws (not provided)  
SureMark with top cover open  
Figure 11. Mounting a Single-Station SureMark on a Wall  
18 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Installing the Fillers  
Installing Fillers for RS-232/RS-485 Printers  
Notes:  
1. On an integrated unit, pull out on the locking lever at the left side of system unit.  
2. Ensure that the side of each filler overlaps the tab on the side of the system  
unit.  
To install fillers:  
1. Power off the system and disconnect the RS-232 power supply (if connected).  
See Figure 4 on page 12.  
2. If you have a video display on an integrated system:  
a. Move the display on its arm to the side and remove any tape holding the  
alignment ring.  
b. Remove the knockout section of the display filler.  
c. Align the display filler with the alignment ring and slide the filler onto the  
ring. Press the display filler into place. See Figure 12 on page 20.  
3. If you do not have a video display, place the display filler on the system unit. Do  
not remove the knockout section. See Figure 12 on page 20.  
4. If you have a short keyboard, place the keyboard filler beside the keyboard. See  
Figure 12 on page 20.  
5. Place the printer filler beside the display filler. Make sure you route the printer  
cable to the side, as shown in Figure 12 on page 20.  
Chapter 2. Installation Instructions 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Knockout  
Section  
Alignment  
Ring  
Display Filler  
Printer Filler  
Display Filler  
Keyboard Filler  
Tab  
Locking Lever  
Cable  
Figure 12. Installing the Fillers for RS-232/RS-485 Systems  
20 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
| Installing Fillers for USB Printers  
|
1. Disconnect the power brick from the printer, if one is connected.  
|
|
|
2. Place the display filler appropriate for the video display on the system unit. Do  
not remove the knockout section unless you have an integrated video mount.  
See Figure 13 on page 22.  
|
|
3. If you have a short keyboard, place the keyboard filler beside the keyboard. See  
Figure 13 on page 22.  
|
|
4. Place the printer filler beside the display filler. Make sure you route the  
keyboard cable to the side, as shown in Figure 13 on page 22.  
|
Chapter 2. Installation Instructions 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Alignment  
Ring  
Knockout  
Section  
Display Filler  
Printer Filler  
Display Filler  
Keyboard Filler  
Tab  
Cable  
Figure 13. Installing the Fillers for USB Systems. (SurePOS 700 Series system is shown as an example.)  
22 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
RS-232 Communication Mode Selections  
Switch settings described in this section apply only when the printer is connected to  
the system with the RS-232 cable. The switch is accessible without removing the  
printer covers. (See Figure 4 on page 12 to see how to access the switch.)  
Baud Rate Selection  
SureMark printers support two RS-232 baud rates, 9600 and 19 200. The baud rate  
is selected using switch 1 on the RS-232 settings switch. Set the switch as follows:  
Switch 1 OFF 9600 baud  
Switch 1 ON 19 200 baud  
The printer normally ships with switch 1 in the OFF position, which selects the 9600  
baud rate.  
RS-232 Communications Protocol Selection  
SureMark printers support RS-232 protocol using either DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF to  
control data transmission. XON/XOFF mode uses system and printer software to  
control the flow of data.  
Use switch 2 on the RS-232 settings switch to select the mode. Switch settings are:  
Switch 2 OFF DTR/DSR control  
Switch 2 ON XON/XOFF control (must use with a 3-wire interface)  
The printer normally ships with switch 2 in the OFF position, which selects  
DTR/DSR control.  
DTR/DSR Control  
DSR Definition: DSR is an output from the printer. It indicates when the printer is  
ready to receive data.  
DTR Definition: DTR is an input to the printer. It indicates to the printer that the  
system is ready to receive data.  
DSR Operation: A DSR signal becomes inactive when the printer is not ready to  
receive data (for example, at power-on reset or when its buffer is full).  
Chapter 2. Installation Instructions 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
DTR Operation: A DTR signal becomes inactive when the system is not ready to  
receive data (for example, at power-on reset or when its buffer is full).  
XON/XOFF Control  
XON Definition:  
= DC1 (X'11')  
= DC3 (X'13')  
XOFF Definition:  
During XON/XOFF control, the printer transmits an XON every 3 seconds after a  
power on reset (POR) completes to indicate the printer is ready to receive data.  
When the first message is received, the printer stops transmitting the XON signal.  
The printer transmits an XOFF when the RS-232 input buffer is 80% full after which  
it transmits one XON when the buffer is 20% full.  
XON/XOFF Transparent Mode Operation  
This is the default mode. See “Message from the Printer” on page 160 for the  
format of printer to system messages, which include a byte count, status bytes, and  
optional extended status bytes or user data.  
XON and XOFF signals are always transmitted independently and are not inside  
any part of the message, including the byte count, status bytes, or user data. When  
a message includes optional user data, the byte count (bytes 1 and 2) can include  
X'10', X'11', or X'13'. When X'10', X'11', or X'13' occur in transparent XON/XOFF  
mode, the byte count is bit-exclusive-OR’ed with X'21' and is prefixed by the DLE  
(X'10') character to become:  
Value in Message  
Becomes  
X'1031'  
X'1030'  
X'1032'  
X'10'  
X'11'  
X'13'  
User data with X'10', X'11', or X'13' is also treated this way in transparent  
XON/XOFF mode. The byte count is not incremented for such extra characters.  
Determining XON/XOFF Control  
You can determine whether XON/XOFF control is being used by sending the  
extended address command and checking the feature byte, bit 3. If this bit is set,  
the printer is in XON/XOFF mode. (See “Extended Address Command – Request  
Printer ID” on page 107.  
Disabling XON/XOFF Transparent Mode  
You can disable transparent XON/XOFF mode as described in “Real-Time  
Requests” on page 156. When disabled, X'10', X'11', or X'13' can occur within  
messages. However, because such values are actual count bytes or data bytes and  
are not XON or XOFF characters (DLE, XON, and XOFF characters do not occur  
within messages), no transform takes place. The values are not bit-exclusive-OR’ed  
with X'21' because no transform occurs for such values within messages as it does  
during transparent XON/XOFF mode. DLE, XON, or XOFF occur only before or  
after a message.  
24 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
| USB Communication Mode  
|
|
|
|
No switches or special commands are required for USB communication. With the  
USB interface card and cables in place, the system automatically detects the printer  
when it is attached and performs any necessary setup. The printer operates at data  
rates up to 12 Mbps.  
USB Selection  
Universal serial bus (USB) is an industry standard communication interface. It is  
used to attach devices, such as printers, displays, and keyboards, to personal  
computers or IBM POS systems that have USB ports. The standard USB port (with  
a power brick) is used to attach the SureMark to personal computers. The powered  
USB port is used to attach the SureMark to IBM POS systems. See Figure 8 on  
page 15 for the thermal/impact SureMark printers and Figure 9 on page 16 for the  
single-station SureMark printers.  
Chapter 2. Installation Instructions 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
26 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software  
Software Adjustments (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Using the 4690 Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Using IBM Point-of-Sale Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Using Reference/Service Diskettes (RS-485 or RS-232 Only) . . . . . . . 28  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
DBCS Code Page Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette Code Page Download. . . . . . . 31  
|
DBCS Code Page Download – POSS for Windows (RS-485 and USB only)  
33  
DBCS User-Defined Character Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette for Updating SureMark Firmware. . . 36  
Using POSS For Windows for Updating SureMark Firmware (RS-485 and  
USB Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Using 4690 OS 4610 Utility to Update SureMark Firmware. . . . . . . . 38  
Updating 4610 Firmware Using RS-232 Attachment Cable . . . . . . . . 38  
Limitation on Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Emulating the IBM Model 3 or Model 4 Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Enabling Emulation Using 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette . . . . . 39  
Enabling Emulation Using 4690 On-Line Terminal Diagnostics . . . . . . 40  
Limitations for Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Printing Saved Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Printing Buffer Data – Thermal/Impact SureMark Models TI5 and TG5  
41  
Printing Buffer Data – Single-Station SureMark Printers . . . . . . . . 41  
Emulating an Epson Single-Station Printer (Single-Station SureMark Only) . . . 41  
Enabling Epson Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Limitations for Epson Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Changing the Printer Mode between DBCS and SBCS . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Proportional Font Conversion Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Resources on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
This chapter describes how to make software adjustments using the 4690 OS, IBM  
POS Device Diagnostics (POSS for Windows, RS-485 and USB only), or diskettes  
and other resources that are available from the Retail Store Solutions Web site.  
See “Resources on the Internet” on page 43 for more information.  
Software Adjustments (Models TI5 and TG5 Only)  
Depending on your operating system and whether the printer is operating in SBCS  
or DBCS mode, you can use the following to make software adjustments to a  
SureMark printer:  
v 4690 Operating System  
v IBM POS Device Diagnostics  
v Reference/service diskettes  
Using the 4690 Operating System  
Note: This procedure is applicable only in SBCS mode, when DBCS is supported  
by customer engagement, or with 4690 OS V2R4, when it is available.  
1. Start Utility Mode by pressing S1, typing 9 5, and then pressing S2.  
2. When “enter request” is displayed, enter the keying sequence from the table for  
the procedure you want to do.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
3. Press S2 to advance through the various parts of the printer adjustment steps.  
4. Type 9 9 and then press S2 to exit.  
Table 2. Adjustment Procedures Using 4690 Operating System  
Procedure  
Keying Sequence  
7, 2, 1, S2  
Print Current Adjustment Values - see Figure 14 on page 30.  
Character Alignment Procedure - see Figure 14 on page 30.  
7, 2, 2, S2  
DI Front Load Print Line Adjustment - see Figure 14 on  
page 30.  
7, 2, 3, S2  
Backlash Adjustment (Landscape)  
Engineering Use Only  
7, 2, 5, S2  
7, 2, 7, S2  
7, 2, 8, S2  
7, 2, 9, S2  
Hardware Setup Option  
Update Printer Firmware  
| Using IBM Point-of-Sale Device Diagnostics  
|
This utility is for RS-485 and USB only.  
|
|
1. Start the IBM Point-of-Sale Device Diagnostics application from the Windows  
Start menu.  
|
|
|
2. Click 4610 Printer.  
3. Click Device Utility.  
4. Select the appropriate tab for the desired adjustment:  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table 3. Adjustment Procedures Using the Point-of-Sale Device Diagnostics  
Procedure  
Tab  
Character Alignment  
Adjustments  
Adjustments  
Adjustments  
Read MCT  
Firmware Update  
Reset Stats  
Reset Stats  
Reset Stats  
Reset Stats  
Reset Stats  
DI Front Load Adjustment  
Backlash Adjustment (Landscape)  
Engineering Use Only  
Firmware Update  
Reset Thermal Print Head Statistics  
Reset CR Motor Statistics  
Reset Impact Print Head Statistics  
Reset DI Motor Statistics  
Reset Transport Motor Statistics  
Using Reference/Service Diskettes (RS-485 or RS-232 Only)  
1. Load the reference/service diskette. See the hardware service manual for your  
system for reference/service diskette procedures.  
2. Select Test Menu.  
3. Select Run POS Device Tests for an RS-485 connection. Select RS232 4610  
Printer Test for an RS-232 connection.  
4. If another system is attached, select the system whose printer you want to  
adjust. This is unnecessary when there is no other system attached.  
5. Select Printer Utilities.  
6. Select the adjustment you want to make from the menu.  
28 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
v Print current adjustment values - see Figure 14 on page 30.  
v Character alignment procedure - see Figure 14 on page 30.  
v DI front load print line adjustment - see Figure 14 on page 30.  
v Document landscape adjustment - see Figure 14 on page 30.  
v Engineering use only  
v Change 4610 Model Configuration  
v Reset printer statistics  
Note: Because the first four adjustments affect only the document insert  
station, they are not displayed as selectable options if the printer is a  
single-station SureMark.  
7. Follow the instructions that are printed on the printer or displayed on the screen.  
8. Press S1 (Esc on the Enhanced A/N Keyboard) to return to the previous menu.  
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
TL1  
TL2  
TL3  
TL4  
TL5  
TL6  
TL7  
CURRENT ADJUSTMENT VALUES  
H 5 = Character alignment  
TL8  
TL9  
TL5 = Top line front insert  
BL3 = Bottom line top insert  
Measure from the top edge of this  
paper to the top of each print line.  
Press the key (1-9) that corresponds  
to the print line that is closest to 5MM.  
CHARACTER ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE  
Press the key (1-9) that corresponds  
to the pair of H's that appear to be  
most aligned  
5 = selected line  
Figure 14. Adjustment and Alignment Printouts  
30 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette  
This utility is for both RS-232 and RS-485 operation. It includes:  
v The latest level of firmware for the printer  
v A README file that describes how to use the utility program.  
v A utility program that performs the following functions:  
– Update printer firmware  
– Configure the printer model  
– Create, edit, and download SBCS user-defined character font, logo image,  
and messages  
– Edit and download DBCS code pages and DBCS user-defined character font  
– Convert fonts and logo files from impact to thermal  
v Sample files for the utility program:  
– An SBCS user-defined character file  
– A message file  
– A logo file  
v Utility program to enable/disable Model 4 Printer emulation (SBCS mode only)  
v Utility program to change the printer mode between DBCS and SBCS  
DBCS Code Page Download  
SureMark models TI5, TG5, TF7, and TM7 can receive a DBCS code page from an  
attached host system connected by an RS-485 cable (cable 7), an RS-232 cable, or  
a USB cable.  
The following mediums can be used to download a DBCS code page:  
v 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette code page download (RS-485 or RS-232  
connection)  
v POSS for Windows DBCS code page download (RS-485 or USB connection)  
v 4690 OS V2R4 font download, when available  
After downloading the latest level software from the Retail Store Solutions Web site  
(see “Resources on the Internet” on page 43), use the appropriate procedure that  
follows to download a DBCS code page.  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette Code Page Download  
Use the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette to download a DBCS code page to  
a SureMark that is connected to a system unit by either an RS-232 or RS-485  
cable.  
To download a diskette font, perform the following steps:  
1. Download the fonts diskette from the Retail Store Solutions Web site (see  
“Resources on the Internet” on page 43).  
2. Download the latest level of the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette from  
the Retail Store Solutions Web site (see “Resources on the Internet” on  
page 43). Place the file that you download, which is 4610dbcs.exe, in a  
temporary directory. Run 4610dbcs.exe in a DOS window to create the  
diskette. If you are using Windows NT, you might need to use FORCEDOS.  
3. Insert the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette in drive A.  
4. Power on the system unit to which the SureMark is connected.  
5. Select Run Printer Utility for the RS-232 or RS-485 connection.  
6. Follow the displayed instructions to complete the font download.  
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
a. Press Enter (OK) at the logo screen.  
b. Select the connection type (RS-485 or RS-232).  
For the RS-232 connection, also select the following:  
v Communications port (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4)  
v Baud rate (9600 or 19 200)  
v Control flow (DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF)  
v IRQ test  
Refer to the communication mode selection switches located at the bottom  
rear of the SureMark printer when making the above selection.  
c. Press Enter (OK).  
d. Select the printer model, then select Enter (OK).  
e. Select F10 (Menu).  
f. Select O (Operations).  
g. Select F (Download Fonts).  
h. If you want to selectively download code pages, go to Step 6j. Otherwise,  
select one of the font sets from the font set menu, then select D  
(Download). Use this option with POSS for Windows, OPOS, or JavaPOS  
drivers.  
The following DBCS font files are downloaded to the printer when you  
select Yes (you can change the list of files in a:\utility\fontset.dat before  
selecting Yes):  
v DBCS for thermal printhead  
v DBCS for impact printhead  
v SBCS for user-defined thermal code page 1  
v SBCS for user-defined impact code page 1  
v DBCS user-defined character for thermal printhead  
v DBCS user-defined character for impact printhead  
i. When prompted, insert the appropriate DBCS Font Diskette in drive A (see  
“Resources on the Internet” on page 43 for information about downloading  
the diskette), then select OK.  
Go to Step 7.  
j. Select S (Selective Download).  
Note: If you are using the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette with a  
printer that will be used with POSS for Windows, OPOS, or  
JavaPOS drivers, then do not use the selective download. If you  
use the selective download with those drivers, the drivers will not  
recognize what DBCS code page has been downloaded.  
k. Select E (Erase EPROM).  
l. Select the code set (SBCS or DBCS), code page, station (Thermal or  
Impact), and characters (Normal or User-Defined).  
m. Select B (Browse) and specify the font file, if required.  
n. Select D (Download).  
o. Select Yes. When prompted, insert the appropriate DBCS Font Diskette in  
drive A (see “Resources on the Internet” on page 43 for information about  
downloading the diskette), then select OK.  
p. Go to Step 7.  
7. After the font download has completed,  
32 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
a. Press Done for confirmation if Download (Step 6h on page 32) was used.  
Press OK for confirmation if Selective Download (Step 6j on page 32) was  
used.  
b. Press C (Close) to close the dialog.  
c. Press Alt-X (Exit) to exit the menu.  
d. Press Enter to exit the utility.  
8. When prompted, reinsert the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette, then  
press Enter.  
9. Remove the diskette from drive A.  
10. Press Ctrl-Alt-Delete to reboot the system.  
DBCS Code Page Download – POSS for Windows (RS-485 and USB  
only)  
DBCS fonts must be manually loaded into the SureMark printer. The process  
requires files that are downloaded from the IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site,  
including the 4610CVNT.EXE and AIPFNT46.EXE programs. For details, refer to the  
POSS Programming Reference and User’s Guide.  
Note: This utility requires POS Suite V1.0.0 or greater. POS Suite includes POSS  
for Windows.  
1. Download the latest DBCS font files from the IBM Retail Store Solutions Web  
site to the same directory in which POSS for Windows is installed, which is  
usually the C:\POS\BIN directory. To access the files on the Web:  
a. Go to the IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site at  
http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/store  
b. Select Support at the left edge of the main page.  
c. Under IBM SurePOS Systems and Peripherals, select IBM SureMark  
Printer.  
d. Select the link to the Model TI5 and TG5 support page.  
e. Select the font files that you want to download.  
The files for each DBCS code page are shown in Table 4.  
Table 4. Font Files for DBCS Code Pages  
Code Page  
File Name  
Codeset  
Station  
Where to Download  
932  
Japan  
Gothic Style  
jpngh16.fnt  
jpngz16.fnt  
jpngh24.fnt  
jpngz24.fnt  
judcz16.fnt  
judcz24.fnt  
SBCS  
DBCS  
SBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
Impact  
Impact  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Impact code page 1  
Impact DBCS  
Thermal code page 1  
Thermal DBCS  
Impact DBCS UDC  
Thermal DBCS UDC  
932  
Japan  
Mincho Style  
jpnmh16.fnt  
jpnmz16.fnt  
jpnmh24.fnt  
jpnmz24.fnt  
judcz16.fnt  
judcz24.fnt  
SBCS  
DBCS  
SBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
Impact  
Impact  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Impact code page 1  
Impact DBCS  
Thermal code page 1  
Thermal DBCS  
Impact DBCS UDC  
Thermal DBCS UDC  
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Table 4. Font Files for DBCS Code Pages (continued)  
Code Page  
File Name  
Codeset  
Station  
Where to Download  
949  
Korea  
kormh16.fnt  
kormz16.fnt  
kormh24.fnt  
kormz24.fnt  
kudcz16.fnt  
kudcz24.fnt  
SBCS  
DBCS  
SBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
Impact  
Impact  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Impact code page 1  
Impact DBCS  
Thermal code page 1  
Thermal DBCS  
Impact DBCS UDC  
Thermal DBCS UDC  
1381  
Chinese  
PRC  
prcmh16.fnt  
prcmz16.fnt  
prcmh24.fnt  
prcmz24.fnt  
pudcz16.fnt  
pudcz24.fnt  
SBCS  
DBCS  
SBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
Impact  
Impact  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Impact code page 1  
Impact DBCS  
Thermal code page 1  
Thermal DBCS  
Impact DBCS UDC  
Thermal DBCS UDC  
(Simplified)  
950  
Chinese  
Taiwan  
rocmh16.fnt (Note 1)  
rocmz16.fnt  
rocmh24.fnt  
rocmz24a.fnt (Note 2)  
rocmz24b.fnt (Note 2)  
rudcz16.fnt  
SBCS  
DBCS  
SBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
Impact  
Impact  
Impact code page 1  
Impact DBCS  
Thermal code page 1  
Thermal DBCS  
Thermal DBCS  
Impact DBCS UDC  
Thermal DBCS UDC  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
(Traditional)  
rudcz24.fnt  
950  
Chinese  
Taiwan  
rocmh16b.fnt (Note 1)  
rocmz16.fnt  
rocmh24.fnt  
rocmz24a.fnt (Note 2)  
rocmz24b.fnt (Note 2)  
rudcz16.fnt  
SBCS  
DBCS  
SBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
DBCS  
Impact  
Impact  
Impact code page 1  
Impact DBCS  
Thermal code page 1  
Thermal DBCS  
Thermal DBCS  
Impact DBCS UDC  
Thermal DBCS UDC  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
Thermal  
(Traditional)  
rudcz24.fnt  
Notes:  
a. The file rocmh16b.fnt contains bold fonts and the file rocmh16.fnt contains  
normal fonts.  
b. The file rocmz24a.fnt contains the BIG-5 code set and the IBM Selected  
non-Chinese character set (first byte A1-F9 and second byte 40-7E, A1-FE).  
The file rocmz24b.fnt contains the IBM Selected non-Chinese/Chinese  
character set (first byte F2-F9 and second byte 81-A0).  
2. Download the 4610CVNT.EXE program and the configuration files that it uses.  
To access the program and its files:  
a. Go to the IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site at  
http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/store  
b. Select Support at the left edge of the main page.  
c. Under SurePOS Peripherals, select IBM SureMark Printer.  
d. Select the link to the Model TI5 and TG5 support page.  
e. Select Font Utility Package to download the zipped file that contains the  
program and the configuration files.  
f. Unzip the program and the configuration files into the same directory that  
contains the font files that you previously downloaded.  
3. Enter the 4610CVNT config_file command to create the font file that will be  
loaded into the printer. config_file is the name of the appropriate configuration  
file from the following list:  
JPNGS932.CFG  
Code page 932, Japan, Gothic style  
34 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
JPNMS932.CFG  
Code page 932, Japan, Mincho style  
KORMS949.CFG  
Code page 949, Korea  
CHNM1381.CFG  
Code page 1381, Chinese – PRC  
CHNM950N.CFG  
Code page 950, Chinese – Taiwan, normal impact SBCS  
CHNM950B.CFG  
Code page 950, Chinese – Taiwan, bold impact SBCS  
4. The font file is created. The file name is XXX.FON, where XXX is the same as  
the configuration file. For example, when you run the 4610CVNT program with  
JPNMS932.CFG, the font file is JPNMS932.FON.  
5. Enter the following command to download the font set to the printer  
(AIPFNT46.EXE should be in the same directory in which POSS for Windows is  
installed, which is usually C:\POS:\BIN)  
AIPFNT46 -s slot_number -p port_number -f font_file  
where:  
slot_number  
The SureMark slot number. This is usually 1.  
port_number  
The SureMark port number. This is usually 17.  
font_file  
The name of the file created by the 4610CVNT.EXE program.  
6. Wait a while. The SureMark font download takes several minutes.  
DBCS User-Defined Character Download  
To create a new character, use the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette with a  
SureMark that is connected to a system unit by either an RS-232 or RS-485 cable.  
The system unit must have a diskette drive, a PC keyboard, and a display.  
To download a user-defined character:  
1. Download the latest level of the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette from the  
Retail Store Solutions Web site (see “Resources on the Internet” on page 43).  
2. Insert the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette in drive A.  
3. Power on the system unit to which the SureMark is connected.  
4. Select Run Printer Utility for the RS-232 or RS-485 connection.  
5. Follow the displayed instructions to complete the font download.  
a. Press Enter (OK) at the logo screen.  
b. Select the connection type (RS-485 or RS-232).  
For the RS-232 connection, also select the following:  
v Communications port (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4)  
v Baud rate (9600 or 19 200)  
v Control flow (DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF)  
Refer to the communication mode selection switches located at the bottom  
rear of the SureMark printer when making the above selection.  
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
c. Press Enter (OK).  
d. Select F10 (Menu).  
e. Select E (Edit).  
f. Select D (Edit Font File).  
g. Insert the font diskette, which includes the DBCS UDC font files. The DBCS  
UDC font file names for each code page and type of station are shown in  
Table 5.  
Table 5. UDC Font File Names for DBCS Code Pages  
Code Page  
File Name  
Station  
932 (Japan)  
judcz16.fnt  
judcz24.fnt  
Impact  
Thermal  
949 (Korea)  
1381 (PRC)  
950 (Taiwan)  
kudcz16.fnt  
kudcz24.fnt  
Impact  
Thermal  
pudcz16.fnt  
pudcz24.fnt  
Impact  
Thermal  
rudcz16.fnt  
rudcz24.fnt  
Impact  
Thermal  
h. Select a font file and press Enter (OK).  
i. Edit the font and save it.  
6. To download the file, see “DBCS Code Page Download” on page 31.  
Firmware Update  
|
|
The SureMark printer has the capability to receive firmware updates from the host  
system unit to which it is attached for RS-485, RS-232, or USB connections.  
The following mediums can be used to update the SureMark firmware:  
v 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette Firmware Update  
v POSS for Windows 4610 Printer Firmware Update Program  
v 4690 OS 4610 Utility  
v Alternative SureMark firmware update method via RS-232 attachment cable  
Use the appropriate procedure that follows to update the SureMark firmware, after  
downloading the latest level software from the Retail Store Solutions Web site (see  
“Resources on the Internet” on page 43).  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette for Updating SureMark  
Firmware  
To update the firmware in SureMark configurations, use the 4610 DBCS Installation  
Utility Diskette with a SureMark that is connected to a system unit by an RS-232 or  
RS-485 cable. The system unit must have a diskette drive, a PC keyboard, and a  
display.  
To update the firmware:  
1. Download the latest level 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette from the Retail  
Store Solutions Web site (see “Resources on the Internet” on page 43).  
2. Insert the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette in drive A.  
3. Power on the system unit that has the SureMark attached by an RS-232 or  
RS-485 cable.  
36 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
4. Select Run Printer Utility for RS-485 or RS-232 connection.  
5. Follow the displayed messages to complete the firmware update.  
a. Press Enter (OK) at the logo screen.  
b. Select the connection type (RS-485 or RS-232).  
For the RS-232 connection, also select the following:  
v Communications port (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4)  
v Baud rate (9600 or 19 200)  
v Control flow (DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF)  
Refer to the communication mode selection switches, which are located at  
the bottom rear of the SureMark printer, when making the above selection.  
c. Press Enter (OK) to proceed.  
d. Select F10 (Menu).  
e. Select O (Operations).  
f. Select A (Advanced Options).  
g. Select U (Update Firmware).  
h. Press Enter twice to select the desired firmware image file (usually only the  
latest firmware image file is available for selection).  
i. Press Enter (Yes) again to commit to firmware update.  
j. The Information screen will display the firmware update percent completed.  
Note: The SureMark flash update will take several minutes. Do not power  
off the host system or SureMark printer after the update has started.  
6. After the firmware update is complete, the SureMark printer will be reset.  
a. Press Enter (OK) to confirm.  
b. Press Alt-X (Exit).  
c. Press Enter to exit.  
7. Remove the diskette from drive A.  
8. Press Ctrl-Alt-Delete to reboot the system.  
Using POSS For Windows for Updating SureMark Firmware (RS-485  
and USB Only)  
If you use a Windows operating system with the SureMark, you can use the POSS  
for Windows 4610 Printer Firmware Update program (AIPFLD46.EXE) to update  
SureMark firmware. For additional information, refer to the POSS Programming  
Reference and User’s Guide.  
Note: This utility requires POS Suite V1.0.0 or greater. POS Suite includes POSS  
for Windows.  
1. Download the latest SureMark firmware update image file from the IBM Retail  
Store Solutions Web site (see “Resources on the Internet” on page 43) to the  
C:\POS\BIN directory. The file is AIP46MC5.HEX for models TI5, TG5, TF7, and  
TM7. Because the file in the directory is more current than the old file, the  
firmware will be automatically updated when the system is powered off, then  
powered on.  
2. To update the SureMark firmware manually, enter the following command:  
AIPFLD46.EXE -S slot_number -P port_number -F microcode_file [-Q]  
where:  
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
slot_number  
The SureMark slot number, which is usually 1. The slot number must be  
specified with decimal values only; hexadecimal values are not  
accepted.  
port_number  
The SureMark port number, which is usually 17. The port number must  
be specified with a decimal value.  
microcode_file  
Must be C:\POS\BIN\AIP46MC5.HEX.  
-Q  
Quiet mode installation (no progress information)  
3. The SureMark flash update will take several minutes.  
|
|
|
|
Note: USB printers connected to one of the SurePOS 700 Series systems can also  
use the IBM Point-of-Sale Device Diagnostics, which is included in the POS  
Suite, to update firmware. See IBM SurePOS 700 Series System Reference  
for information about the IBM Point-of-Sale Device Diagnostics.  
Using 4690 OS 4610 Utility to Update SureMark Firmware  
|
|
|
4690 OS users with SureMark printers that use RS-485 or USB connections to  
attach to medialess systems can update SureMark firmware (flash) by using the  
4690 OS 4610 Utility Program function of 4690 OS.  
|
|
|
|
|
Note: 4690 OS level 9910 or greater is required to use this utility.  
1. To invoke the utility, press Ctrl S1, 95, Ctrl S2.  
2. Press 729, Ctrl, S2 at the ENTER REQUEST prompt.  
3. Press 1, Ctrl S2 to continue.  
4. Message T7175 will display to confirm that the flash update has started.  
|
|
5. The SureMark flash update will take several minutes. Message ″T9514 Enter  
Request″ displays after the 4610 flash update completes.  
|
6. Enter 99, Ctrl S2 to end the SureMark utility.  
Updating 4610 Firmware Using RS-232 Attachment Cable  
To use the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette to update SureMark firmware for  
configurations that do not have a diskette drive and display and PC keyboard, you  
must provide a temporary RS-232 attachment to a host PC that does have a  
diskette drive.  
Before starting the firmware update, you must obtain the following parts:  
v RS-232 attachment cable, either 2 meters in length (P/N 86H2192) or 4 meters in  
length (P/N 86H2195).  
v SureMark Power Supply (for RS-232 configurations only), P/N 42H1176.  
If the SureMark is currently attached to a host system unit that does not support a  
diskette drive, use the following procedure to temporarily connect the SureMark to a  
host PC that has a diskette drive, RS-232 port, PC keyboard and display.  
1. Disconnect the SureMark (RS-485 #7) attachment cable and temporarily  
connect an RS-232 attachment cable to the SureMark.  
2. Connect the SureMark via the RS-232 port connector to an alternate host PC  
that has a diskette drive.  
38 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
3. Follow the procedure in “4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette for Updating  
SureMark Firmware” on page 36, starting with Step 1, to complete the printer  
firmware update.  
4. Reconnect the SureMark to the original host system unit using the original  
attachment cables.  
Limitation on Updating Firmware  
The following limitation must be considered when updating firmware on the  
SureMark printer:  
v SureMark firmware update cannot be performed if the printer currently has Model  
4 emulation enabled. If emulation is enabled, temporarily disable Model 4  
emulation, then start the SureMark firmware update. After the firmware update is  
complete, re-enable Model 4 emulation. See “Emulating the IBM Model 3 or  
Model 4 Printers” for additional information.  
Emulating the IBM Model 3 or Model 4 Printers  
Note: This procedure only applies to SBCS mode.  
It is possible to emulate the IBM Model 3 or Model 4 printer with the SureMark  
printer. You must change the configuration to enable the SureMark to emulate the  
Model 3 or Model 4 printers.  
The following mediums can be used to set up Model 3 or Model 4 emulation:  
v For systems with diskette drives, use the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette  
(see “Enabling Emulation Using 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette”).  
Download the latest level diskette from the Retail Store Solutions Web site (see  
“Resources on the Internet” on page 43).  
v For medialess systems using the 4690 OS, use the 4690 OS Online Terminal  
Diagnostics (see “Enabling Emulation Using 4690 On-Line Terminal Diagnostics”  
on page 40).  
Enabling Emulation Using 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette  
The following information is also available in the 4610MOD4.TXT file on the  
diskette.  
Notes:  
1. All SureMark firmware levels for models TI5, TG5, TF7, and TM7 support  
emulation.  
2. 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette V1.00 or later is required.  
To set up Model 3 or Model 4 emulation using the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility  
Diskette:  
1. Insert the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette in drive A.  
2. Power on the system unit.  
3. Select MOD4 when the menu is displayed.  
4. Perform the specified steps to either enable or disable emulation.  
To enable when emulation is currently disabled:  
1. Select one of the following:  
v Model 4 emulation with Offline mode disabled  
v Model 4 emulation with Offline mode enabled  
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
The printer is reconfigured.  
2. Press Ctrl-Alt-Delete to reboot the system. The system IPLs.  
To disable when emulation is currently enabled:  
1. Select Disable Model 4 emulation.  
2. Press Ctrl-Alt-Delete to reboot the system. The system IPLs.  
Enabling Emulation Using 4690 On-Line Terminal Diagnostics  
Note: 4690 OS Version 1 level 9740 or greater is required to use this utility.  
To set up Model 3 or Model 4 emulation using the 4690 On-Line Terminal  
Diagnostics:  
1. To invoke the utility, press Ctrl S1, 95 Ctrl S2.  
2. At the ENTER REQUEST prompt, press 728, Ctrl, S2. This brings up the  
function to switch the mode of the printer.  
3. Perform the specified steps to either enable or disable emulation. The operating  
system recognizes the current state of printer emulation and displays the  
appropriate prompts.  
To enable emulation:  
1. Select TI3.  
2. At the Activate Model 3/4 Emulation 1=N, 2=Y, S2 prompt, enter 2 to enable  
Model 3/4 emulation.  
3. At the Using EJ in Offline Mode? 1=N, 2=Y, S2 prompt, select Y if you want to  
store all the journal data in the printer’s flash memory.  
To disable emulation:  
1. At the Disable Mod 3/4 Emulation 1=N, 2=Y, S2 prompt, enter 2 to disable  
Model 3/4 emulation.  
Limitations for Emulation  
The following limitations must be considered when using the SureMark printer to  
emulate the Model 3 or Model 4 printer.  
v Emulation mode is supported only in SBCS mode.  
v Printing the face of checks requires application changes (franking the back of  
checks should not).  
v Printing wide documents may require changes. The document station on the  
Model 4 printer supports 86 characters, the SureMark supports 47 characters.  
v Journal commands can be ignored or stored in the printer’s flash memory. This  
needs to be decided when the printer is initially configured.  
v There is no top document registration (documents must be inserted from the  
front).  
v User-defined special characters are not supported.  
v Emulation mode does not support the Model 4A double-byte character set.  
v For RS-485, emulation mode is currently only supported on 4690 OS and DOS  
systems. For USB, emulation mode is currently only supported on 4690 OS.  
Emulation is not supported for RS-232.  
|
|
|
40 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Printing Saved Data  
When the printer is offline in Model 3/4 emulation mode and the option for storing  
data to the printer was selected, it is possible to fill up the printer flash memory.  
When the memory is full, a printer error indicates the journal station is out of paper.  
You can empty the printer buffer by printing out the data that is stored in the flash  
memory. The data prints on the customer receipt station. The data in the buffer is  
erased only after the last line of data is printed.  
Printing Buffer Data – Thermal/Impact SureMark Models TI5 and  
TG5  
To print the buffer data from the beginning:  
1. Press and hold both buttons. When the printer ready indicator begins blinking,  
release both buttons.  
2. Press and release both buttons again.  
Notes:  
1. If the SureMark printer encounters an error (for example, the paper runs out or  
the cover is opened) while printing the data, the data remains intact.  
2. To stop printing the data, open and close the ribbon cover. When you are ready  
to print the data, use the procedure above to restart printing from the beginning.  
3. To stop printing and restart at the current position, open and close the paper  
cover. Printing immediately restarts.  
Printing Buffer Data – Single-Station SureMark Printers  
To print the buffer data from the beginning:  
1. Open the top cover. The LED will flash quickly.  
2. Press and hold the paper feed button for 5 seconds.  
3. The LED will show one short blink, accompanied by a beep, followed by a  
1-second pause.  
4. Press and hold the paper feed button for 5 seconds.  
5. The LED will change to a long blink. The beeper will sound continuously.  
6. Close the cover to begin printing the electronic journal data.  
Notes:  
1. If the SureMark printer encounters an error (for example, the paper runs out or  
the cover is opened) while printing the data, the data remains intact.  
2. To stop printing the data, open the top cover, turn the printer power switch ON,  
turn the printer power switch OFF, and close the top cover. When you are ready  
to print the data, use the procedure above to restart printing from the beginning.  
3. To stop printing and restart at the current position, open and close the top cover.  
Printing immediately restarts.  
4. Pressing and releasing the paper feed button a third time before closing the top  
cover will cause the printer to return to normal mode.  
Emulating an Epson Single-Station Printer (Single-Station SureMark  
Only)  
Emultation of an Epson single-station printer is supported on the single-station  
SureMark printers in SBCS mode.  
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Enabling Epson Emulation  
To enable emulation of an Epson single-station printer on a single-station SureMark  
printer, you must set switch 3 on the main logic card. See Figure 15.  
RS-232 mode switches  
Cash drawer connector  
Figure 15. Switch for Epson Emulation  
Limitations for Epson Emulation  
The following limitations must be considered when using the SureMark printer to  
emulate an Epson single-station printer.  
v Logos and downloadable characters are supported in emulation mode. However,  
because the Epson printer prints at 150 dpi and the SureMark prints at 200 dpi,  
the emulated printout will be smaller.  
v Emulation of page mode is not supported on the SureMark.  
v Epson supports the Select paper sensor to stop printing command. IBM does not  
support a low paper sensor.  
Changing the Printer Mode between DBCS and SBCS  
To disable DBCS printing (that is, to enter SBCS mode), use the 4610 DBCS  
Installation Utility Diskette.  
Note: This procedure requires 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette V1.00 or  
later.  
1. Insert the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette in drive A.  
2. Power on the system unit.  
3. Select Change Printer Mode when the menu is displayed.  
4. Perform the specified steps to change the printer mode.  
To set to DBCS Mode:  
a. Select DBCS Mode.  
b. Press Ctrl-Alt-Delete to reboot the system. The system IPLs.  
To set to SBCS Mode:  
a. Select SBCS Mode.  
42 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
b. Press Ctrl-Alt-Delete to reboot the system. The system IPLs.  
Proportional Font Conversion Utility  
As part of its support for proportional fonts, IBM provides three TrueType fonts and  
a utility that you can use to convert the fonts to files that the SureMark printer can  
use.  
The application and instructions for downloading the converted fonts are available  
from the Retail Store Solutions Web site. See “Resources on the Internet” for more  
information.  
Note: You might have TrueType fonts other than those supplied by IBM on your  
system. Before using the conversion utility to convert and download any  
non-IBM fonts for use by the SureMark printer, you must confirm that you  
have received authorization from the owner of the fonts to convert and  
download the fonts.  
Resources on the Internet  
The IBM Retail Store Solutions Web site at  
http://www.ibm.com/solutions/retail/store contains publications for the  
SureMark Printer. The Web site also provides access to diskettes, drivers, and  
miscellaneous documentation, such as README files and OEM paper certification  
information.  
Select Support at the left on the main page of the Web site, then select IBM  
SureMark Printer. The displayed page contains links both to documentation and to  
diskettes and drivers that you can download for the SureMark printers.  
Chapter 3. SureMark Installation, Service, and Utility Software 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
44 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Part 2. Models TI5 and TG5  
This part contains operational, testing, and problem determination information for  
SureMark Models TI5 and TG5 is a thermal/impact printer with DBCS support.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
46 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Chapter 4. Operation (Models TI5 and TG5)  
Operating Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Ribbon Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Paper Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Thermal Printhead Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Note: All covers must be installed on the SureMark printer during operation.  
Operating Controls and Indicators  
There are two triangular-shaped buttons and two LED indicators located on top of  
the printer. The buttons serve multiple functions.  
When the topmost indicator is on continuously, the printer is powered ON and ready  
for printing. When the indicator blinks, one of the following conditions exists:  
v The printer is out of paper.  
v The cover is open.  
v The printer is offline.  
v The printer has a nonrecoverable home error.  
The second LED is the Document Present indicator. It lights when a document is  
inserted far enough into the document insert (DI) station to reach the DI sensor.  
When this LED blinks, the DI station is waiting for you to insert a document.  
The topmost button is the customer receipt (CR) paper feed button. Press this  
button to advance the CR paper. The lower button is the document feed button.  
Press this button to advance the document.  
If you press both buttons at the same time and then release them, the document  
insert throat opens. The throat must be open to insert a document from the side.  
Press and then release both buttons again to close the throat.  
Both buttons are also used to test the printer. See “Offline Tests” on page 56 for  
additional button functions.  
Paper Cover  
Customer Receipt Printer  
Ribbon Cover  
Printer Ready LED  
Document Printer  
Customer Receipt Feed Button  
Document Present LED  
Document Feed Button  
Figure 16. SureMark Printer - Indicators, Controls, and Printing Stations (Models TI5 and  
TG5)  
The printer is capable of printing information on an inserted document. Figure 17 on  
page 48 shows how to side load a document to align it exactly where you want it to  
be printed.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Figure 17. Inserting Documents  
Figure 18 and Figure 19 on page 49 show the printable area on an inserted  
document for both portrait and landscape.  
Figure 18. Printable Area of an Inserted Document (Portrait)  
48 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Figure 19. Printable Area of an Inserted Document (Landscape)  
Ribbon Loading  
1. Open the ribbon cover. As the cover is opened, the printhead moves to a  
position where you can easily load a ribbon.  
Figure 20. Opening the Ribbon Cover  
2. If there is already a ribbon cartridge installed, remove it by lifting it straight up.  
Chapter 4. Operation (Models TI5 and TG5) 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Note: You might need to grab the body of the cartridge rather than the top to  
remove it.  
Figure 21. Ribbon Cartridge Loading  
3. Maintain ribbon tension by turning the ribbon cartridge knob as shown in  
Figure 21. Lower the cartridge into position until the notches on its sides snap  
into place on the printer guides. Once the cartridge is in place, turn the knob  
until the ribbon slides into place between the printhead and the ribbon shield.  
See Figure 22 for correct ribbon positioning.  
Ribbon Shield  
Printhead  
Correct  
Not Correct  
Figure 22. Ribbon Path around the Printhead  
4. Close the ribbon cover.  
50 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Paper Loading  
1. Open the paper cover.  
2. If there is any unused paper or if there is an empty paper roll core in the paper  
roll bucket inside the printer, remove it before inserting a new paper roll. You  
can throw the core in the trash can.  
Figure 23. Paper Cover – Models TI5 and TG5  
Note: Refer to the label on the inside of the paper cover for a diagram of how  
to load paper.  
3. See Figure 24 on page 52 and place the paper roll into the paper roll bucket as  
shown. The leading edge of the paper should come from the direction of the  
front of the printer and go across the top of the roll as shown in the diagram. If  
it feeds from the bottom of the roll, nothing will be printed on the paper.  
Note: The thermal printhead will not print on paper with glue on it. If the new  
paper roll was sealed by glue, tear off the 6 to 8 inches of paper with  
glue on it before loading it. Or, you can advance the paper after loading  
to get rid of the glued paper.  
Chapter 4. Operation (Models TI5 and TG5) 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Not Correct  
Correct  
Paper Roll  
Thermal  
Platen  
Paper  
Roll Core  
Figure 24. Paper Loading Path –: Models TI5 and TG5  
4. Place the leading edge of the paper over the metal guide. See Figure 24.  
5. Close the paper cover.  
6. Press the customer receipt feed button to advance the paper to verify that the  
paper is feeding correctly. Feed 30 cm (about 1 ft) of paper through to test for  
correct alignment.  
Attention: Do not pull the receipt paper out of the printer with the paper access  
cover closed. This disengages the paper feed. The paper feed motor must then  
catch up before the printer can feed the paper, which causes missing lines or partial  
lines of print. Use the customer receipt feed button to advance the receipt and all  
lines will print.  
52 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Thermal Printhead Cleaning  
The thermal printhead can be cleaned whenever print quality deteriorates.  
1. Open the paper cover.  
2. Using a cotton swab soaked in isopropyl alcohol, gently wipe the printhead  
several times on its print line and on the surrounding area. See Figure 25.  
3. Wipe off any residual alcohol with a dry swab.  
If print quality does not improve after cleaning the thermal printhead, call for  
service.  
Detailed View of Thermal Printhead  
Thermal Print Line  
Paper Cover  
Figure 25. Printhead and Print Line Area – Models TI5 and TG5  
Chapter 4. Operation (Models TI5 and TG5) 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
54 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Chapter 5. Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TI5 and  
TG5  
DANGER  
To avoid a shock hazard, do not connect or disconnect any cables  
or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this  
product during an electrical storm.  
DANGER  
To avoid shock hazard:  
The power cord must be connected to a properly wired and  
earthed receptacle.  
Any equipment to which this product will be attached must also  
be connected to properly wired receptacles.  
Note: For translations of these safety notices, see IBM Safety Information — Read  
This First, GA27–4004.  
Testing the Printer  
When you power on the SureMark printer, it runs a power-on self-test (POST). If the  
POST finds no errors, the printer is ready for operation. Follow this procedure to  
determine if there are errors.  
Note: Never connect or disconnect the printer when power is applied (when LEDs  
are on).  
1. If the printer is powered on, power off the printer and power it on again.  
|
|
|
v If the printer is attached to the system with the RS-232 cable or the standard  
USB cable with a power brick, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect the  
power cord to a properly wired and grounded power source.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with the RS-485 cable, power off the  
POS system, and then power on the system, which also powers on the  
printer.  
|
|
v If the printer is attached to the system with a powered USB cable, the  
USB-attached printer can be hot-plugged.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Printer Ready LED  
Customer Receipt Feed Button  
Document Present LED  
Document Feed Button  
2. Check the status of the Printer Ready indicator:  
Printer ready indicator ON:  
The Power On Self Test completed successfully.  
Printer ready indicator OFF or blinking:  
The POST failed.  
3. If the POST fails or if you suspect problems with your system, see “Problem  
Determination” on page 59.  
4. See “Offline Tests” and run the offline tests. If the offline tests fail or you suspect  
problems with your system, see “Problem Determination” on page 59.  
Offline Tests  
The following offline tests are used as diagnostic tools to ensure the printer is  
operating correctly.  
Customer Receipt Test  
1. Press and hold both buttons to enter offline mode. When the printer ready  
indicator begins blinking, release both buttons.  
2. Press and release the customer receipt feed button to start this test.  
3. See Figure 26 on page 57 and verify that your printer has printed correct  
information for your model and configuration:  
v Double-byte enabled for Models TI5 and TG5  
v RS-232 or RS-485 serial interface or USB interface  
v Applicable parameters for RS-232 communications:  
– 9600 or 19 200 baud rate  
|
– DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF control  
v A solid line should appear as the last line of the test pattern.  
If any characters that appear in Figure 26 on page 57 are missing from the test  
pattern you print, or if the solid line is missing, go to “Problem Determination” on  
page 59.  
Document Insert Test  
1. Insert a document in the document insert station. The document present  
indicator should come on.  
If the document present indicator does not come on, realign the document.  
If pressing the document feed button does not feed the document, go to  
“Problem Determination” on page 59.  
56 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
2. Press and hold both buttons to enter offline mode. When the printer ready  
indicator begins blinking, release both buttons.  
3. Press and release the document feed button to print the test pattern. The test  
pattern includes all printable characters in the resident code page, printed in the  
default font.  
4. See Figure 26 and verify that your printer has printed correct information for  
your model and configuration:  
v Model type (double-byte enabled for Models TI5 and TG5).  
v Communication options (RS-232, RS-485, or USB).  
v RS-232 parameters, if applicable.  
|
v A solid line should appear as the last line of the test pattern.  
If any characters that appear in Figure 26 are missing from the test pattern you  
print, or if the solid line is missing, go to “Problem Determination” on page 59.  
T
The Printers S/N is 12345678  
1
2
3
4
6
Microcode EC level is 30  
Serial Interface: RS232  
Serial Interface: 19.2K Baud, XON / XOFF  
Double Byte Character Sets  
|"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<->?ABCDEFGHIKJK  
LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw  
5
,
xyz{|}~.CüéâäàåcêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÿÖÜø£ØSsáíóú  
7
·
ÁÑGg¿ · · · · ¡ · ·  
ÁÂÀI  
¢ · · · · · · · · ãà  
·
^
`
^
`
`
`
`
HIIII · · · · · · · · · · · · · õÐÊËÈÍÎÏÌÓßOO õÕµþÞUUUyY ÷ ·  
Cuts:  
139  
CR Characters Printed:  
CR Motor Steps:  
142834  
659340  
593  
11589  
68453  
5174  
2
CR Cover Openings:  
DI Characters Printed:  
DI Feed Motor Steps:  
DI Transport Motor Passes:  
DI Home Errors:  
8
9
DI Cover Openings:  
DI Documents Inserted:  
3
58  
Figure 26. Offline Printer Test Pattern – Customer Receipt Station (Models TI5 and TG5)  
Test Pattern Notes:  
1. The serial number that prints will be the actual serial number of your printer.  
2. The microcode level will be the actual level of your printer’s microcode.  
|
|
3. The serial interface will be specified as RS232, RS485, or USB, depending on  
which interface is used to attach the printer to the system unit.  
4. The line speed information appears only when the RS-232 interface is used.  
The value can be either 9.6 K Baud or 19.2 K Baud, depending on the RS-232  
switch settings. (See “RS-232 Communication Mode Selections” on page 23.)  
5. The RS-232 control mode information appears only when the RS-232 interface  
is used. The value can be either DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF, depending on the  
RS-232 switch settings. (See “RS-232 Communication Mode Selections” on  
page 23.)  
Chapter 5. Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TI5 and TG5 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
6. The feature enabled lines will appear only when the feature is installed.  
7. These lines break at different points for the test pattern printed in the document  
insert (DI) station.  
8. This section contains printer usage statistics that you can use for problem  
determination.  
9. The line across the bottom should be solid with no blank spaces.  
58 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Resetting the Printer - Offline  
1. Press and hold both buttons (Customer Receipt Feed button and Document  
Feed button) to enter offline mode. Release both buttons when the Printer  
Ready indicator begins to blink.  
2. Open the customer receipt cover, then close it. The printer resets.  
Problem Determination  
Any problems that arise with a SureMark printer are either software errors or  
hardware failures. This section contains information to help you determine the  
cause of a problem and how to solve it.  
If the SureMark printer fails, use Table 6 to identify and report the problem. Follow  
the procedures described in the table. If you cannot identify and solve the problem,  
call your service representative.  
Table 6. Troubleshooting – Models TI5 and TG5  
If the problem is...  
Here’s what to do...  
Printer ready indicator is off.  
v If connected to a system using the RS-485 communication port, check that the  
system is powered on and cable 7 is connected.  
|
|
|
v If using the RS-232 communication port or a USB port with a power brick,  
check that the brick power supply is connected to the printer and plugged into  
an ac power source.  
|
|
v If using USB communication with a powered USB cable, check that the  
system is powered on.  
Printer ready indicator is blinking.  
v Check that the customer receipt station has paper loaded correctly. Close the  
cover and push the Customer Receipt Feed button to feed a small amount of  
paper.  
v Check the document insert station printhead and paper path for any  
obstructions.  
v Check that the paper and ribbon covers are closed.  
Customer receipt station is feeding  
paper, but is not printing.  
v Ensure that the paper roll is not upside down. Go to “Paper Loading” on  
page 51.  
v Clean the printhead. See “Thermal Printhead Cleaning” on page 53.  
Document insert station is not  
printing  
v Check the paper path.  
v Check to see if the ribbon is installed correctly.  
v Change the ribbon, go to “Ribbon Loading” on page 49.  
Notes:  
1. Record all symptoms before calling for service.  
2. If you receive software error messages, refer to the application program’s  
software manual.  
3. Call your service representative.  
Chapter 5. Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TI5 and TG5 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
60 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Part 3. Models TF7 and TM7  
This part contains operational, testing, and problem determination information for  
SureMark models TF7 and TM7. These models are the single-station SureMark  
printers with DBCS support.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
62 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Chapter 6. Operation (Models TF7 and TM7)  
Operating Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Paper Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Thermal Printhead Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Note: All covers must be installed on the SureMark printer during operation.  
Operating Controls and Indicators  
There is one triangular-shaped button and one light-emitting diode (LED) indicator  
located on top of the printer.  
When the LED indicator is on continuously, the printer is powered on and ready for  
printing. When the indicator blinks, one of the following conditions exists:  
v The printer is offline (offline testing is enabled).  
v The printer is out of paper.  
v The cover is open.  
v The cutter is jammed.  
See “Offline Test” on page 68 for additional button functions.  
Top cover  
Printer ready  
LED  
Customer receipt  
feed button  
Figure 27. SureMark Printer - Indicator, Control, and Printing Station (Models TF7 and TM7)  
Paper Loading  
1. Open the paper cover.  
2. If there is any unused paper or if there is an empty paper roll core in the paper  
roll holder inside the printer, remove it before inserting a new paper roll. You can  
throw the core in the trash can.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. If the printer is configured for ″snap in″ paper loading (two white spheres are  
present behind the metal springs), then place the paper roll onto the paper roll  
holder as shown in Figure 28 on page 64; otherwise, drop the roll into the  
bucket. The leading edge of the paper should come from the direction of the  
back of the printer and go across the bottom of the roll as shown in the  
diagram.  
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The thermal printhead will not print on paper with glue on it. If the new  
paper roll was sealed by glue, tear off the 15 to 20 cm (6 to 8 in.) of  
paper with glue on it before loading it. Or, you can advance the paper  
after loading to get rid of the glued paper.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Top cover  
Sphere  
Paper roll  
Metal  
Spring  
Bucket  
Figure 28. Paper Loading Path  
4. Pull the end of the paper up over the paper roll and toward the back of the  
printer.  
Note: Refer to the label on the inside of the bottom cover for a diagram of how  
to load paper.  
5. Close the paper cover.  
6. Press the customer receipt feed button to advance the paper and verify that the  
paper is feeding correctly. Feed 30 cm (about 1 ft) of paper through to test for  
correct alignment.  
64 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Top cover  
Sphere  
Paper roll  
Metal  
Spring  
Bucket  
Figure 29. Paper Loading Path (Models TF7 and TM7)  
Attention: Do not pull the receipt paper out of the printer with the paper access  
cover closed. This might cause partial lines of print. Use the customer receipt feed  
button to advance the receipt.  
Chapter 6. Operation (Models TF7 and TM7) 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Thermal Printhead Cleaning  
The thermal printhead can be cleaned whenever print quality deteriorates.  
1. Open the paper cover.  
2. Using a cotton swab soaked in isopropyl alcohol, gently wipe the printhead  
several times on its print line and on the surrounding area. See Figure 30.  
3. Wipe off any residual alcohol with a dry swab.  
If print quality does not improve after cleaning the thermal printhead, call for  
service.  
Detail View of Thermal Print Head  
Thermal Print Line  
Figure 30. Printhead and Print Line Area (Models TF7 and TM7)  
66 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Chapter 7. Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TF7 and  
TM7  
DANGER  
To avoid a shock hazard, do not connect or disconnect any cables  
or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this  
product during an electrical storm.  
DANGER  
To avoid shock hazard:  
The power cord must be connected to a properly wired and  
earthed receptacle.  
Any equipment to which this product will be attached must also  
be connected to properly wired receptacles.  
Note: For translations of these safety notices, see IBM Safety Information — Read  
This First, GA27-4004.  
Testing the Printer  
When you power on the SureMark printer, it runs a power-on self-test (POST). If the  
POST finds no errors, the printer is ready for operation. Follow this procedure to  
determine if there are errors.  
Note: Never connect or disconnect the printer when power is applied (when the  
LED is on).  
1. If the printer is powered on, power OFF the printer and power it on again.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with the RS-232 cable or the standard  
USB cable with a power brick, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect the  
power cord to a properly wired and grounded power source.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with the RS-485 cable, power OFF the  
POS system, and then power on the system, which also powers on the  
printer.  
v If the printer is attached to the system with a powered USB cable, the USB  
attached printer can be hot-plugged.  
v For single-station printers, use the printer’s power on/off switch that is located  
under the top cover. Power OFF the printer, then power ON the printer  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Top cover  
Printer ready  
LED  
Customer receipt  
feed button  
2. Check the status of the Printer Ready indicator:  
Printer Ready indicator ON:  
The power-on self test completed successfully.  
Printer Ready indicator OFF or blinking:  
The POST failed.  
3. If the POST fails or if you suspect problems with your system, see “Problem  
Determination” on page 70.  
4. See “Offline Test” and run the offline test. If the offline test fails or you suspect  
problems with your system, see “Problem Determination” on page 70.  
Offline Test  
An offline printing test is provided as a diagnostic tool to ensure the printer is  
operating correctly.  
1. Open the top cover.  
2. Press and hold the paper feed button for 5 seconds. The LED indicator will  
make one quick flash followed by a pause. The beeper will make a short single  
tone periodically.  
3. Release the paper feed button.  
4. Close the top cover.  
5. See Figure 31 on page 69 and verify that your printer has printed correct  
information for your model and configuration:  
v Double-byte enabled  
|
v RS-232, RS-485 or USB serial interface  
v Applicable parameters for RS-232 communications:  
– 9600 or 19 200 baud rate  
– DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF control  
v A solid line should appear as the last line of the test pattern.  
If any characters that appear in Figure 31 on page 69 are missing from the test  
pattern you print, or if the solid line is missing, go to Table 7 on page 70.  
68 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
T
The Printers S/N is 12345678  
1
2
3
4
6
Microcode EC level is 30  
Serial Interface: RS232  
Serial Interface: 19.2K Baud, XON / XOFF  
Double Byte Character Sets  
|"#$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:;<->?ABCDEFGHIKJK  
LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw  
5
,
xyz{|}~.CüéâäàåcêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÿÖÜø£ØSsáíóú  
7
·
ÁÑGg¿ · · · · ¡ · ·  
ÁÂÀI  
¢ · · · · · · · · ãà  
·
^
`
^
`
`
`
`
HIIII · · · · · · · · · · · · · õÐÊËÈÍÎÏÌÓßOO õÕµþÞUUUyY ÷ ·  
Cuts:  
12363  
CR Characters Printed:  
CR Motor Steps:  
CR Cover Openings:  
CR Cut Fails:  
77626  
88974  
17  
8
9
7
Figure 31. Offline Printer Test Pattern – Models TF7 and TM7  
Test Pattern Notes:  
1. The serial number that prints will be the actual serial number of your printer. (If  
the logic card has been replaced, this number must be reset to the original  
serial number.)  
2. The microcode level will be the actual level of your printer’s microcode.  
3. The serial interface will be specified as RS232, RS485, or USB, depending on  
which interface is used to attach the printer to the system unit.  
4. The line speed information appears only when the RS-232 interface is used.  
The value can be either 9.6K baud or 19.2K baud, depending on the RS-232  
switch settings. (See “RS-232 Communication Mode Selections” on page 23.)  
5. The RS-232 control mode information appears only when the RS-232 interface  
is used. The value can be either DTR/DSR or XON/XOFF, depending on the  
RS-232 switch settings. (See “RS-232 Communication Mode Selections” on  
page 23.)  
6. The feature-enabled lines will appear only when a feature is installed.  
7. This section contains the print test pattern.  
8. This section contains printer usage statistics that you can use for problem  
determination.  
9. The line across the bottom should be solid with no blank spaces.  
RS-232 Hex Dump  
An RS-232 hex dump is provided to help diagnose problems with models TM7 and  
TF7.  
To enable hex dump mode for the Model TF7 or TM7 printer, press and hold the  
paper feed button while the printer is powered on. If the top cover is open, this also  
puts the printer in power-up offline mode.  
Chapter 7. Testing and Problem Analysis – Models TF7 and TM7 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Resetting the Printer - Offline  
To reset the printer:  
1. Open the top cover.  
2. Power off the printer using the power on/off switch that is located in the right  
front corner of the printer.  
3. Power on the printer.  
Problem Determination  
Any problems that arise with a SureMark printer are either software errors or  
hardware failures. This section contains information to help you determine the  
cause of a problem and how to solve it.  
If the SureMark printer fails, use Table 7 to identify and report the problem. Follow  
the procedures described in the table. If you cannot identify and solve the problem,  
call your service representative.  
Table 7. Troubleshooting – Models TF7 and TM7  
If the problem is...  
Here’s what to do...  
Printer ready indicator is OFF.  
v Check that the printer power switch, which is located under the top cover, is  
set ON.  
v If connected to a system using the RS-485 communication port, check that the  
system is powered on and cable 7 is connected.  
v If using the RS-232 communication port or a USB port with a power brick,  
check that the brick power supply is connected to the printer and plugged into  
an ac power source.  
v If using USB communication with a powered USB cable, check that the  
system is powered ON.  
Printer ready indicator is blinking.  
v Check that the customer receipt station has paper loaded correctly. Close the  
cover and push the Customer Receipt Feed button to feed a small amount of  
paper.  
v Check that the cover is closed.  
Customer receipt station is feeding  
paper, but is not printing.  
v Ensure that the paper roll is in correctly. Go to “Paper Loading” on page 51.  
v Clean the printhead. See “Thermal Printhead Cleaning” on page 53.  
Notes:  
1. Record all symptoms before calling for service.  
2. If you receive software error messages, refer to the application program’s  
software manual.  
3. Call your service representative.  
70 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Part 4. Appendixes  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
72 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Appendix A. Consumable Supplies  
Paper Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Thermal Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Document Insert Forms (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Single and Multipart Form Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Print Ribbons (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Paper Specifications  
Attention: Using an inferior grade of paper can affect print quality and the life of  
printheads and the printer mechanism. See “Resources on the Internet” on page 43  
for information about OEM paper certifications for the SureMark.  
Thermal Paper  
The paper used in the thermal receipt station must meet the following requirements:  
Width 79.5 0.5 mm (3.13 0.02 in.)  
Outside Diameter  
80 mm (3.15 in.) maximum for SureMark Models TI5 and TG5  
90 mm (3.54 in.) maximum for single-station SureMark printers  
Thickness  
0.057  
0.065  
0.075  
0.008 mm (0.00224  
0.005 mm (0.00256  
0.005 mm (0.00295  
0.0003 in.)  
0.0002 in.)  
0.0002 in.)  
Weight  
55 3 g/m₂ (14.7 0.8 lb)  
The paper must be wound with the printing side facing out and with the outer edge  
glued to prevent unraveling. The paper should not be attached to the core in any  
manner. There should be 1.5 to 2.1 m (5 to 7 ft.) of red stripe at the end of the roll.  
Note: Non-topcoated thermal paper can be recycled along with other paper  
products. They can also be incinerated and sent to landfills with no more  
effect on the environment than regular office paper waste.  
Important  
Printer reliability and performance are directly related to the quality of the  
supplies used by the customer. The published parameters for printer  
performance are established using supplies that meet the specifications listed  
above.  
Thermal paper with post-processing, such as (but not limited to) watermarks,  
coupons, or advertisements printed on the front or back of the paper, is not  
covered by IBM’s specifications. Some inks and printing processes will work  
acceptably, while others will not. Printer problems that are caused by supplies  
that do not meet IBM’s specifications may result in a billable service call,  
regardless of the existence of a service contract.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Document Insert Forms (Models TI5 and TG5 Only)  
The printers will accommodate single and multipart forms.  
74 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Single and Multipart Form Specifications  
Specification  
Value  
Minimum width:  
50 mm (2 in.)  
0.47 mm (0.0185 in.)  
Maximum thickness of multipart forms:  
Maximum thickness of front sheet, multipart 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)  
forms:  
Minimum thickness of single-part form:  
0.10 mm (0.004 in.)  
Note: Test all forms in the printer to ensure acceptable performance prior to buying  
a significant quantity. There should be no binding holes or other holes within  
10 mm (0.4 in.) from the right edge of the form.  
Print Ribbons (Models TI5 and TG5 Only)  
The ribbon is an Epson ERC-35 or equivalent.  
Attention: Using an inferior grade of ribbon can affect print quality and the life of  
printheads and the printer mechanism.  
Appendix A. Consumable Supplies 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
76 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Appendix B. Technical Information  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Memory Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Immediate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Voltage Conversion Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
RS-485 Serial I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Cash Drawer Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
RS-232 Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
RS-232 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
USB Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Code Page Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Generic Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Code Page 437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Code Page 858 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Code Page 860 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Code Page 863 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Code Page 865 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Code Page 932 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Code Page 949 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Code Page 950 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
Code Page 1381 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Character Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Thermal Printing Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Impact Printing Fonts (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
|
General Description  
All SureMark printers print the customer receipt using the thermal printhead. For  
SureMark printers that include a document insert station, documents are printed  
using the impact head. No SureMark printer contains a journal print station.  
Thermal printing occurs by placing a heating element against a thermally sensitive  
paper. By energizing the elements, dots are formed. Thermal printers print dot rows  
horizontally across the page – 576 dots make up a single dot row across the paper.  
Printing continues row by row until the entire character is formed.  
Impact printing utilizes a standard ballistic printhead. Each wire is fired against an  
inked ribbon which places a dot on the paper.  
SureMark printers contain all the circuitry, processing hardware, and software for  
operating a thermal and, except for models TF7 and TM7, an impact printer  
mechanism. SureMark printers do not contain a power supply. However, they do  
contain voltage conversion circuitry to allow connection to a standard IBM system  
interface or to an RS-232 24-volt power supply. (See “Power Requirements” on  
page 8 for specific power supply specifications.)  
Specifications  
The information in the Document Insert Station column of Table 8 on page 78  
applies only to SureMark Models TI5 and TG5. There is no document insert station  
on models TF7 and TM7.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Table 8. Station Characteristics  
Characteristic  
Customer Receipt Station  
Document Insert Station  
Speed (see note  
following table)  
SBCS characters: 39.2 lps at 6 lpi,  
SBCS characters: 52 lps at 8 lpi  
DBCS characters: 50 lps at 7.7 lpi  
4.3 lps  
Paper Width  
TI5/TG5 – 80 mm (3.15 in.)  
TF7/TM7 – 90 mm (3.54 in.)  
Print Width (Resident 34 SBCS characters at 12 cpi,  
37 SBCS characters at 12 cpi,  
47 SBCS characters at 15 cpi,  
52 SBCS characters at 17 cpi  
Code Page)  
44 SBCS characters at 15 cpi,  
48 SBCS characters at 17 cpi,  
57 characters at 20 cpi  
Print Width (DBCS  
Code Page)  
38 SBCS characters per line  
19 DBCS characters per line  
Korea:  
43 SBCS characters per line  
21 DBCS characters per line  
Others:  
24 SBCS characters per line  
12 DBCS characters per line  
Pitch (Resident SBCS 12, 15, 17, 20 cpi  
Code Page)  
12, 15, 17 cpi  
Note: In order to conserve power, SureMark models TI5, TG5, TF7, and TM7  
reduce their throughput when printing high print densities, such as logo  
messages or full black lines. Because these types of print messages are  
used on a limited basis, the overall performance when printing a customer  
receipt is not noticeably affected.  
The reduced print speed is based on the number of print dots that are turned  
on for a given print line, which is defined as dot utilization. Dot utilization is  
typically low for normal character printing and up to 100% for full black line  
printing. The SureMark printer operates at 52 lps at low dot utilization, and at  
slower speeds as the dot utilization increases.  
Table 9. Sound Characteristics  
Type  
Description  
LwAd  
Idling (bels) Operating  
(dB)  
LpAm  
Idling (dB) Operating  
(dB)  
<LpA>m  
Operating  
(bels)  
Idling (dB)  
SureMark  
TI5  
Printer  
5.7  
N/A  
61.5  
N/A  
47  
N/A  
Notes:  
LwAd The declared upper limit of the sound power level for a random sample of  
machines.  
LpAm The mean value of the A-weighted sound pressure levels at the operator  
position (if any) for a random sample of machines.  
<LpA>m  
The mean value of the A-weighted sound pressure levels at the one-meter  
(bystander) positions for a random sample of machines.  
N/A  
Indicates not applicable.  
All measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in  
conformance with ISO 9296.  
78 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Memory Units  
Random access memory (RAM) is used for storing the image data for the thermal  
printhead and program code. It is also used for storing incoming data from the  
communication port.  
Flash memory is used for many purposes, including:  
v Character set storage (1600 KB on Models TI5 and TG5, 1100 KB on models  
TF7 and TM7)  
v Personalized message storage (8 KB)  
v Logo or APA message storage (64 KB)  
v Flash memory data storage (300 KB on Models TI5 and TG5, 80 KB on models  
TF7 and TM7)  
v Program code (256 KB)  
Personalized messages are those messages that are printed on each receipt in a  
POS environment. Storing these messages in the flash memory greatly reduces the  
data transmission time to the printer and the processing time of that data by the  
microprocessor. This is also true of graphics or APA messages, which require a  
significant amount of transmission and processing time.  
Flash memory can also be used as a storage place for customer data. This data  
could be journal data.  
Immediate Commands  
SureMark models TI5, TG5, TF7, and TM7 have 16 KB of memory to store  
incoming commands and data.  
Most commands will be received and then executed sequentially. However, several  
commands execute immediately upon receipt. These commands are:  
v “Download Graphics (Logo) Commands” on page 109  
v “Predefine Messages” on page 111  
v “Download User-Defined Characters” on page 112  
v “Extended Address Command – Request Printer ID” on page 107  
v “Real-Time Requests” on page 156.  
Voltage Conversion Circuitry  
The printer requires two voltages. The printheads and motors use +24 V dc.  
Powering the logic circuitry requires +5 V dc. Printer input voltage is one of the  
following:  
Communication Mode  
Power Requirement  
+38 V dc or +24 V dc, and +5 V dc  
+24 V dc  
RS-485  
RS-232  
USB  
|
+24 V dc  
|
|
|
|
In each case, a single dc-to-dc converter converts voltage to +24 V dc and +5 V dc.  
An autoswitch circuit on the interface card senses the operating mode (RS-485,  
RS-232, powered USB, or standard USB with power brick) and routes input  
voltages appropriately.  
Appendix B. Technical Information 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
|
|
v When operating in RS-485 mode, the +38 V dc is converted to +24 V dc and the  
+5 V dc is passed straight through.  
|
|
v When operating in RS-232 or USB mode or RS-485 mode in Japan, the +24 V  
dc is passed through and is also converted to +5 V dc.  
Note: Both voltage sources should not be connected to the printer at the same  
time, even if one of the sources is powered off. System damage could occur  
under these conditions.  
RS-485 Serial I/O Parameters  
Printer Address:  
35  
AWAIT-60H  
BWAIT-48H  
extra stop bits (after printer address)  
extra bits/byte (after printer data bytes)  
For more information about serial I/O communications, see 4680 Store Systems  
Serial I/O Channel Attachment Information, which is available from IBM Industry  
Corporate Relations.  
Cash Drawer Connector Pin Assignments  
The SureMark printers have a single cash drawer connector. This connector can  
drive either a single cash drawer (see “Description of Models” on page 4 for the  
cable part number) or two cash drawers using a special cable. The connector also  
provides a status line which indicates if one of the cash drawers is open.  
Drive voltage for each cash drawer solenoid is 24 V dc at a current of 1 ampere.  
Connector pins are assigned as follows:  
Pin  
1
2
3
4
Signal  
Not Connected  
Solenoid 1 Driver  
Cash Drawer Status  
+24 V dc  
5
6
Solenoid 2 Driver  
Ground  
The cash drawer solenoids should be connected between pins 4 and 2 for cash  
drawer 1 and between pins 4 and 5 for cash drawer 2. A ″Y″ cable is required to  
bring out all the appropriate lines to attach the two units.  
The cash drawer status line has a 10k resistor pull-up connected to the +5 V dc.  
Note: The drawer sensor should switch pin 6 to pin 3 when the drawer is open.  
RS-232 Connector Pin Assignments  
SureMark printers contain a 9-pin D-shell connector port for RS-232 communication.  
This port is on the interface card, accessible under the printer without removing  
printer covers. The connector has the following pin functions:  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Not Connected  
2
Transmit  
80 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Receive  
DTR (Not connected on 3-wire cable)  
Signal Ground  
DSR (Not connected on 3-wire cable)  
Not Connected  
Not Connected  
Not Connected  
See “Description of Models” on page 4 for the cable part number.  
RS-232 Parameters  
Protocol  
DTR/DSR mode or XON/XOFF mode. Dip switch selectable.  
Baud rate  
9600 or 19 200, selectable by DIP switch  
Start 1 bit  
Data 8 bits  
Parity None  
Stop 1 bit  
Table 10. 9-pin to 9-pin RS-232 Connector Layout  
System Description  
Pin 2 - Rx (input)  
Pin 3 - Tx (Output)  
Pin 4 - DTR (Output)  
Pin 5 - Gnd  
Printer Description  
Pin 2- Tx (Output)  
Pin 3 - Rx (Input)  
Pin 4 - DTR (Input)  
Pin 5 - Gnd  
Pin 6 - DSR (Input)  
Pin 8 - CTS (Input)  
Pin 6 - DSR (Output)  
Pin 6 - DSR (Output)  
Table 11. 25-pin to 25-pin RS-232 Connector Layout  
System Description  
Pin 2 - Tx (Output)  
Pin 3 - Rx (Input)  
Pin 5 - CTC (Input)  
Pin 6 - DSR (Input)  
Pin 7 - Gnd  
Printer Description  
Pin 3 - Rx (Input)  
Pin 2 - Tx (Output)  
Pin 6 - DSR (Output)  
Pin 6 - DSR (Output)  
Pin 5 - Gnd  
Pin 20 - DTR (Output)  
Pin 4 - DTR (Input)  
| USB Connector Pin Assignments  
|
|
|
|
|
SureMark printers contain a USB port, if the USB feature is installed. This port is on  
the interface card, accessible under the printer without removing printer covers.  
Connection to the port can be with either the standard USB Type B connector,  
which requires a 24-volt power brick, or with the powered USB connector, which  
contains 24-volt power lines within the communications cable.  
|
The standard USB Type B connector has the following pin functions:  
|
|
Pin  
1
Signal  
Vbus (+5 V dc)  
Appendix B. Technical Information 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
|
|
|
2
3
4
Minus data  
Plus data  
Ground  
|
The powered USB connector has the following pin functions:  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Pin  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Signal  
Ground (+24 V dc)  
+24 V dc  
Ground (Vbus)  
Plus data  
Minus data  
Vbus +5 V dc  
+24 V dc  
Ground (+24 V dc)  
|
See “Description of Models” on page 4 for the cable part numbers.  
Code Page Definitions  
The SureMark printer has a resident character set that supports these code pages:  
v Generic  
v 437 (US)  
v 858 (International)  
v 860 (Portuguese)  
v 863 (Canadian French)  
v 865 (Norwegian)  
You can download one of the following double-byte character set (DBCS) code  
pages using the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette:  
v 932 (Japanese)  
v 949 (Korean)  
v 950 (Chinese – Traditional)  
v 1381 (Chinese – Simplified)  
You can also download three user-defined character sets for thermal printing and  
one character set for impact printing using the 4610 DBCS Installation Utility  
Diskette. See “Resources on the Internet” on page 43 for more information.  
82 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Generic Code Page  
°
Pt  
¥
§
Figure 32. Printer’s Resident Character Set - Generic Code Page  
Appendix B. Technical Information 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Code Page 437  
Figure 33. Code Page 437  
84 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Code Page 858  
Hex1st  
2_ 3_ 4_ 5_ 6_ 7_ 8_ 9_ A_ B_ C_ D_ E_ F_  
2nd  
_0  
.
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
.
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
C
Í
Ó
.
_1  
_2  
_3  
_4  
_5  
_6  
_7  
_8  
_9  
_A  
_B  
_C  
_D  
_E  
_F  
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
G
g
¿
.
.
Ô
Ò
õ
Õ
µ
Þ
þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
.
.
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
.
ö
.
.
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
I
.
û
÷
.
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
Î
(
ÿ
Ï
.
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
.
.
*
J
j
.
.
.
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
.
.
.
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
.
.
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
S
s
i
.
Ý
.
.
¢
.
.
^
~
.
Ä
Å
.
Ì
H
I
/
-
.
.
¤
.
.
Figure 34. Code Page 858  
Appendix B. Technical Information 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Code Page 860  
Figure 35. Code Page 860  
86 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Code Page 863  
Figure 36. Code Page 863  
Appendix B. Technical Information 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Code Page 865  
Figure 37. Code Page 865  
88 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Code Page 932  
Hex1st  
2_ 3_ 4_ 5_ 6_ 7_ 8_ 9_ A_  
C _ D_ E_ F_  
B_  
2nd  
£
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
p
q
_0  
!
"
A
a
b
c
d
e
_1  
_2  
_3  
_4  
_5  
_6  
_7  
_8  
_9  
_A  
_B  
_C  
_D  
_E  
_F  
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
r
#
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
$
%
&
f
'
g
h
(
)
*
i
j
k
l
+
,
-
.
/
]
^
m
\
~
n
o
_
Figure 38. Code Page 932  
Notes:  
1. The single-byte characters in this code page are mapped to the user-defined  
code page (user-defined thermal code page 1 and user-defined impact code  
page 1).  
2. The shaded portion is interpreted as the first byte of a double-byte character.  
Appendix B. Technical Information 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Code Page 949  
Hex1st  
2_ 3_ 4_ 5_ 6_ 7_ 8_ 9_ A_  
C _ D_ E_ F_  
B_  
2nd  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
W
]
^
_
p
q
_0  
!
"
A
a
b
c
d
e
_1  
_2  
_3  
_4  
_5  
_6  
_7  
_8  
_9  
_A  
_B  
_C  
_D  
_E  
_F  
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
r
#
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
$
%
&
f
'
g
h
(
)
*
i
j
k
l
+
,
-
.
/
m
}
~
n
o
Figure 39. Code Page 949  
Notes:  
1. The single-byte characters in this code page are mapped to the user-defined  
code page (user-defined thermal code page 1 and user-defined impact code  
page 1).  
2. The shaded portion is interpreted as the first byte of a double-byte character.  
90 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Code Page 950  
Hex1st  
2_ 3_ 4_ 5_ 6_ 7_ 8_ 9_ A_  
C _ D_ E_ F_  
B_  
2nd  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
p
q
_0  
!
"
A
a
b
c
d
e
_1  
_2  
_3  
_4  
_5  
_6  
_7  
_8  
_9  
_A  
_B  
_C  
_D  
_E  
_F  
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
r
#
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
$
%
&
f
'
g
h
(
)
*
i
j
k
l
+
,
-
.
/
m
}
~
n
o
Figure 40. Code Page 950  
Notes:  
1. The single-byte characters in this code page are mapped to the user-defined  
code page (user-defined thermal code page 1 and user-defined impact code  
page 1).  
2. The shaded portion is interpreted as the first byte of a double-byte character.  
Appendix B. Technical Information 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Code Page 1381  
Hex1st  
2_ 3_ 4_ 5_ 6_ 7_ 8_ 9_ A_  
C _ D_ E_ F_  
B_  
2nd  
£
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
p
q
_0  
!
"
A
a
b
c
d
e
_1  
_2  
_3  
_4  
_5  
_6  
_7  
_8  
_9  
_A  
_B  
_C  
_D  
_E  
_F  
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
r
-
|
#
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
$
%
&
f
'
g
h
(
)
*
i
j
k
l
+
,
-
.
/
m
}
~
n
o
Figure 41. Code Page 1381  
Notes:  
1. The single-byte characters in this code page are mapped to the user-defined  
code page (user-defined thermal code page 1 and user-defined impact code  
page 1).  
2. The shaded portion is interpreted as the first byte of a double-byte character.  
92 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Character Fonts  
This section describes font capabilities. For more information about font-related  
commands, see:  
v “Download User-Defined Characters” on page 112  
v “Set Print Station” on page 128  
v “Set Print Mode” on page 125  
v “Set Code Page” on page 129  
v “Set Inter-Character Spacing” on page 129  
v “Select User-Defined or Resident Character Sets” on page 129  
Thermal Printing Font  
There are three font sizes for the resident character set on Models TI5, TG5, TF7,  
and TM7:  
v Font A is 10 dots (wide) × 20 dots (high) with the last 2-dot row used for  
descenders (1.25-mm × 2.5-mm character height including descenders, 1.25 mm  
× 2.25 mm excluding descenders).  
v Font B is 12 dots (wide) × 24 dots (high) with the last 2-dot row used for  
descenders (1.5-mm × 3.0-mm character height including descenders, 1.5 mm ×  
2.75 mm excluding descenders).  
v Font C is 8 dots (wide) × 16 dots (high) with the last 2-dot row used for  
descenders (1.0 mm × 2.0 mm character height including descenders, 1.0 mm ×  
1.75 mm excluding descenders).  
There are two character sizes for a DBCS code page:  
v A double-byte character is 24 dots (wide) × 24 dots (high) or 3.0-mm × 3.0-mm  
character height.  
v A single-byte character is 12 dots (wide) × 24 dots (high) or 1.5-mm × 3.0-mm  
character height.  
The number of characters printed per inch depends on the character size, the  
inter-character spacing, and the chosen font. For example:  
v For SBCS resident code page:  
– 17 cpi ⇒ 10-dot wide character + 2-dot space (font A) ⇒ 48 characters per  
line on 80-mm paper or 33 characters per line on 58-mm paper  
– 15 cpi ⇒ 10-dot wide character + 3-dot space (font A) ⇒ 44 characters per  
line on 80-mm paper or 30 characters per line on 58-mm paper  
– 12 cpi ⇒ 12-dot wide character + 5-dot space (font B) ⇒ 34 characters per  
line on 80-mm paper or 23 characters per line on 58-mm paper  
– 20 cpi ⇒ 8-dot wide character + 2-dot space (font C) ⇒ 57 characters per line  
on 80-mm paper or 40 characters per line on 58-mm paper  
v For DBCS code page:  
– For DBCS characters: 6.7 cpi ⇒ 24-dot-wide character + 6-dot space ⇒ 19  
characters per line on 80-mm paper or 13 characters per line on 58-mm paper  
– For SBCS characters: 13.5 cpi ⇒ 12-dot wide character + 3-dot space ⇒ 38  
characters per line on 80-mm paper or 26 characters per line on58-mm paper  
You can choose the character size of three user-defined character sets (code  
pages) within the following parameters:  
v 8 ≤ dot width ≤ 16  
v 16 ≤ dot height ≤ 32 (must be a multiple of 2)  
The parameter ranges for characters in proportional fonts are:  
Appendix B. Technical Information 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
v 8 ≤ dot width ≤ 32  
v 8 ≤ dot height ≤ 32  
Notes:  
1. Any of the thermal printing fonts can be scaled up to eight times the defined  
width and eight times the defined height. The scaling factor for the width does  
not have to equal the scaling factor for the height. For example, you could  
specify twice the width and five times the height.  
2. For 80-mm paper, the cash receipt print line is 72 mm (2.83 in.) long. There are  
576 dots per line and 203 dots per inch.  
3. For 58-mm paper, the cash receipt print line is 50 mm (1.97 in.) long. There are  
400 dots per line and 203 dots per inch. (This paper width is supported only on  
Models TF7 and TM7. Support is available by an RPQ.)  
Impact Printing Fonts (Models TI5 and TG5 Only)  
The resident character set has a font of 7 half-dots (wide) × 9 dots (high). There are  
no descenders.  
v Font A prints 150 half-dots per inch = resident character size is 1.2 mm × 2 mm.  
v Font B prints 120 half-dots per inch = resident character size is 1.5 mm × 2 mm.  
For DBCS code page 949:  
v A double-byte character is 16 half-dots (wide) × 9 dots (high).  
v A single-byte character is 8 half-dots (wide) × 9 dots (high).  
For DBCS code page 932, 950, and 1381:  
v A double-byte character is 16 full-dots (wide) × 16 dots (high).  
v A single-byte character is 16 half-dots (wide) × 16 dots (high).  
The number of characters printed per inch depends on the character size, the  
inter-character spacing, and the chosen font. For example:  
v For SBCS resident code page:  
– 17 cpi ⇒ font A with 7 half-dot-wide character + 2 half-dot space ⇒ 52  
characters per line  
– 15 cpi ⇒ font A with 7 half-dot-wide character + 3 half-dot space ⇒ 47  
characters per line  
– 12 cpi ⇒ font B with 7 half-dot-wide character + 3 half-dot space ⇒ 37  
characters per line  
v For DBCS code page:  
– For DBCS code page 949: 16 half-dot-wide character + 6 half-dot space  
Font A: 150 half-dots per inch ⇒ 21 characters per line  
Font B: 120 half-dots per inch ⇒ 17 characters per line  
– For SBCS code page 949: 8 half-dot-wide character + 3 half-dot space  
Font A: 150 half-dots per inch ⇒ 43 characters per line  
Font B: 120 half-dots per inch ⇒ 34 characters per line  
– For DBCS code pages 932, 950, 1381: 16 full-dot-wide character + 6 half-dot  
space  
Font A: 150 half-dots per inch ⇒ 12 characters per line  
Font B: 120 half-dots per inch ⇒ 9 characters per line  
94 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
– For SBCS code pages 932, 950, 1381: 8 full-dot wide character + 3 half-dot  
space  
Font A: 150 half-dots per inch ⇒ 24 characters per line  
Font B: 120 half-dots per inch ⇒ 19 characters per line  
You can choose the character size of the one user-defined character set (code  
page) within the following parameters:  
v 4 ≤ half-dot width ≤ 16  
v 4 ≤ dot height ≤ 16  
Notes:  
1. Any of the impact printing fonts can be printed double-wide, double-high, or both  
double-wide and double-high. For better print quality with double-high  
characters, set the printer to unidirectional print mode. See “Set or Cancel  
Unidirectional Printing” on page 135.  
2. User-defined characters greater than 9 dots high cannot be printed in landscape  
mode.  
3. The document print line is 80.35 mm (3.16 inches) long. There are 474 half-dots  
per line for font A, and 379 half-dots per line for font B.  
4. You can print in two densities on the impact printer: 120 half-dots per inch or  
150 half-dots per inch. Refer to the description of bits 0 and 1 in “Set Print  
Mode” on page 125 for information about changing the density.  
Appendix B. Technical Information 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
96 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information  
RS-232 Commands Summary by Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Alphabetized RS-232 Commands Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
System Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Exercise Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Verify Previous Commands Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Status Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Extended Address Command – Request Printer ID . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Preset or Onetime-Set Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Download Graphics (Logo) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Example: n1 = 2 & n2 = 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Predefine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Download User-Defined Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Thermal Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Proportional Font. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Impact Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Download Double-Byte Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Thermal Printhead (s=0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Impact Printhead (s=1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Flash Storage Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Erase Flash EPROM Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Send Checksum of Flash EPROM Sector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Microcode Tolerance (MCT) Information - Loading . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Microcode Tolerance (MCT) Information - Request . . . . . . . . . . 123  
DBCS Address Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Set Print Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Set or Cancel Double-Wide Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Set or Cancel Double-High Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Set or Cancel Underline Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Set or Cancel Overline Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Set or Cancel Invert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Set or Cancel Emphasized Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Set or Cancel High Quality Print Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Set Print Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Select User-Defined or Resident Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set Code Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set Inter-Character Spacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Set Inter-Character Spacing – DBCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Set or Cancel Rotated Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Set Print Station Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
Select 1/8-Inch Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Select 1/6-Inch Line Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Select Color Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Set Line Spacing Using Minimum Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Set Sheet Eject Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set Horizontal Tab Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set Left Margin Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Set Relative Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Align Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Set or Cancel Unidirectional Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Set Error Recovery Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Define Document Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Status Sent to System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Select Character for Reprinted Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Reinitialize the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Enable or Disable the Feed Buttons (Models TI5 and TG5 Only) . . . . . 138  
Enable or Disable the Beeper (Models TF7 and TM7 Only) . . . . . . . 139  
Enable or Disable Upside-Down Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Select Character Size for Scalable Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Fix Font Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Print Logo Inline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Enable or Disable Two-Color Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Bar Code Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Print Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142  
Print Bar Code Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Select Horizontal Size of Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
Select Bar Code Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Select Printing Position of Human Readable Information (HRI) . . . . . . 146  
Select Font for HRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Print PDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Select PDF417 ECC (Error Correction Codewords) Level . . . . . . . . 147  
Select Aspect Ratio PDF417 Bar Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Enable PDF417 Truncation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Print Character Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Print and Line Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
Print and Line Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Print, Form Feed, and Cut the Paper (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Print and Feed Paper n lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Print and Feed Paper Using Minimum Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
Print Graphic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Select and Print a Graphics (Logo) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
Print Predefined Graphics (Logo) Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
Print Predefined Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Tab to Next Tab Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Return Home (Select Printhead Location). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Paper Cut/DI Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Generate Drive Pulse for Cash Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153  
Retrieve the Flash Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Retrieve Size of User Flash Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Retrieve Printer Usage Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Asynchronous (Real-Time) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Real-Time Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Data Buffer Management and Batch Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Reset Line Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Disable Line Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Hold Printing Until Buffer is Released . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Document Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Portrait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Landscape Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Landscape Printing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Message from the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Status Byte 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Status Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Status Byte 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
Status Byte 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Status Byte 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Status Byte 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
|
98 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Status Byte 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Status Byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
This appendix applies only to SureMark printers that attach to a POS system with  
an RS-232 cable connection.  
If you use the RS-485 or USB interfaces, refer to 4610 driver documentation in the  
appropriate book for your operating system:  
Operating System  
4690 OS Version 2 DBCS  
DOS  
IBM Publication  
IBM 4690 OS API Specification for IBM 4610 Printers  
IBM Point-of-Sale Subsystem for DOS Programming  
Reference  
OS/2, Windows NT, Windows IBM Point of Sale Subsystem Programming Reference and  
95, and Windows 3.1x User’s Guide  
The 4690 OS manual is available on the current maintenance diskette for the IBM  
4690 Operating System. Current versions of all three manuals are available on the  
Internet. See “Resources on the Internet” on page 43 for more information.  
RS-232 Commands Summary by Function  
Table 12. RS-232 Commands Organized by Function  
Description  
Command  
Page  
System Commands  
Exercise Program  
Status request  
ESC x or X'1B78'  
107  
107  
107  
ESC v or X'1B76'  
Extended address command-request  
printer ID  
GS | SOH or X'1D49;01' This is an IMMEDIATE command.  
Verify previous commands completed  
Preset or Onetime-Set Commands  
Download graphics (logo) commands  
Predefine messages  
X'1B;00;80;00'  
107  
GS * logo_num n1 n2 data or X'1D2A';logo_num;n1;n2;data  
109  
111  
GS : message_num data GS : or  
X'1D3A;message_num;data;'X'1D3A'  
Download user-defined characters  
Thermal code page  
ESC & s n m data or X'1B26;s;n;m;data'  
MCT commands  
112  
113  
114  
116  
117  
121  
121  
122  
122  
Proportional font  
ESC & s n m data or X'1B;26;s;n;m;data'  
MCT commands  
Impact code page  
Download double-byte characters  
Flash storage write  
ESC ( s n data or X'1B28;s;n;data'  
ESC ’ n1 n2 data or X'1B27;n1;n2;data'  
ESC # n or X'1B23;n'  
Erase flash EPROM sector  
Send checksum of flash EPROM sector ESC ″ n or X'1B22;n'  
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information ESC M n h l or X'1B4D;n'.  
- loading  
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information ESC S n or X'1B53;n'  
- request  
123  
125  
DBCS address vectors  
Setup Commands  
Set print mode  
ESC S n or X'1B53;n'  
ESC ! n or X'1B21;n'  
125  
100 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Table 12. RS-232 Commands Organized by Function (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
126  
127  
127  
127  
127  
128  
128  
128  
129  
Set or cancel double-wide mode  
Set or cancel double-high mode  
Set or cancel underline mode  
Set or cancel overline mode  
Set or cancel invert mode  
Set or cancel emphasized printing  
Set or cancel high quality print mode  
Set print station  
ESC W n:ehp1. or X'1B57;n'  
ESC h n or X'1B68;n'  
ESC − n or X'1B2D;n':  
ESC x‘5F’ n or X'1B5F;n'  
ESC H n or X'1B48;n'  
ESC G n or X'1B47;n'  
ESC / n or X'1B;2F;n'  
ESC c 0 n or X'1B6330;n'  
ESC % n or X'1B25;n'  
Select user-defined or resident  
character sets  
Set code page  
ESC t n or X'1B74;n'  
129  
129  
130  
130  
130.  
131  
131  
132  
132  
133  
133  
133  
134  
134  
135  
135  
136  
137  
137  
137  
138.  
138  
139  
140  
141  
141  
141  
Set inter-character spacing  
Set inter-character spacing - DBCS  
Set or cancel rotated character  
Set print station parameters  
Select 1/8-inch line spacing  
Select 1/6-inch line spacing  
Select color printing  
ESC SP n or X'1B20;n'  
ESC T n or X'1B;52;n'  
ESC V n or X'1B56;n'  
ESC c 1 n or X'1B6331;n'  
ESC 1 or X'1B31'.  
ESC 2 or X'1B32'  
ESC r n or X'1B;72;n'  
Set line spacing using minimum units  
Set sheet eject length  
ESC 3 n or X'1B33;n'  
ESC C n or X'1B43;n'  
Set horizontal tab positions  
Set left margin position  
ESC D [n1 n2] NUL NUL or X'1B44[n1 n2]0000'  
ESC $ n1 n2 or X'1B24;n1;n2'  
ESC \ n1 n2 or X'1B5C;n1;n2'  
ESC a n or X'1B61;n'.  
Set relative position  
Align positions  
Set or cancel unidirectional printing  
Set error recovery function  
Define document wait time  
Status sent to system  
ESC U n or X'1B55;n'  
ESC c 4 n or X'1B63;34;n'  
ESC f x y or X'1B66;x;y'  
ESC ) n or X'1B29;n'  
Select character for reprinted lines  
Reinitialize the printer  
ESC + n or X'1B2B;n'  
ESC @ or X'1B40'.  
Enable/disable the feed buttons  
Enable/disable the beeper  
Enable/disable upside-down printing  
ESC c 5 n X'1B;63;35;n'  
ESC BEL n1 n2 or X'1B;07;n1;n2'  
ESC { n or X'1B 7B n'  
Select character size for scaleable fonts GS ! n or X'1D;21;n'  
Fix font matrix  
ESC : n or X'1B 3A n'  
Print logo inline  
GS J d n1 n2 data or X'1D 4A d n1 n2 data'  
GS ; n or X'1D 3B n'  
Enable/disable two-color printing  
Bar Code Commands  
Print bar code  
GS k n NUL or X'1D6B;n;data;00'  
GS w n or X'1D77;n'  
142  
145  
Select horizontal size of bar code  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Table 12. RS-232 Commands Organized by Function (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
146  
Select bar code height  
GS h n or X'1D68;n'  
GS H n or X'1D48;n'  
Select printing position of  
146  
human-readable information (HRI)  
Select font for HRI  
GS f n or X'1D66;n'  
146  
147  
147  
Print PDF417 Bar Code  
GS P data NUL or X'1D;50;data;00'  
GS R n or X'1D;52;n1;n2'  
Select PDF417 Error Correction  
Codewords Level  
Select Aspect Ratio PDF417 Bar Code GS S r;c or X'1D;53;r;c'  
148  
148  
Enable PDF417 Truncation  
Print Character Commands  
Print and line feed  
GS T n or X'1D;54;n'  
LF or X'0A'  
CR or X'0D'  
148  
149  
149  
149  
149  
Print and line feed  
Print, form feed, and cut the paper (FF) FF or X'0C'  
Print and feed paper n lines  
ESC d n or X'1B64;n'  
Print and feed paper using minimum  
units  
ESC J n X'1B4A;n'  
Print Graphic Messages  
Select and print a graphics (logo)  
command  
ESC * d w h data or X'1B2A;d;w;h;data'  
GS / m logo_num or X'1D2F;m;logo_num'  
GS ^ message_num or X'1D5E;message_num'  
150  
151  
152.  
Print predefined graphics (logo)  
command  
Print predefined messages  
Miscellaneous Commands  
Tab to next tab stop  
HT or X'09'  
152  
153  
153  
153.  
154  
154  
154  
Return home (select printhead location) ESC < n or 1B3C;n  
Paper cut/DI eject  
ESC i or ESC m -- X'1B69' or X'1B;6D'  
Generate drive pulse for cash drawer  
Retrieve the flash storage  
ESC p m n1 n2 or X'1B70;m;n1;n2'  
ESC 4 n1 n2 X'1B34;n1;n2'  
Retrieve size of user flash storage  
Retrieve printer usage statistics  
Asynchronous (Real-Time) Commands  
ESC 4 x ’03 FF FF FF’ or X'1B;34;03;FF;FF;FF'  
X'1B 51 xx'  
102 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Table 12. RS-232 Commands Organized by Function (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
Real-time requests  
DLE ENQ n or X'1005n'  
156  
n
Description  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
40  
41  
42  
43  
Release print buffer  
Cancel print buffer  
Undefined  
EC request; send status  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Reset printer  
Enable unsolicited status  
Disable unsolicited status  
Disable transparent XON/XOFF  
Data Buffer Management and Batch Printing  
Reset line count  
ESC 6 or X'1B36'  
ESC 8 n or X'1B;38'n  
ESC 7 or X'1B37'  
157  
157  
157  
Disable line count  
Hold printing until buffer is released  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Alphabetized RS-232 Commands Summary  
Table 13. RS-232 Commands in Alphabetical Order  
Description  
Command  
Page  
134  
125  
157  
136  
117  
Align positions  
ESC a n or X'1B61;n'  
ESC S n or X'1B53;n'  
ESC 8 n or X'1B;38'n  
ESC f x y or X'1B66;x;y'  
ESC ( s n data or X'1B28;s;n;data'  
DBCS address vectors  
Disable line count  
Define document wait time  
Download double-byte characters  
Download graphics (logo)  
commands  
GS * logo_num n1 n2 data or X'1D2A;logo_num;n1;n2;data'  
109  
Download user-defined characters ESC & s n m data or X'1B26;s;n;m;data'  
112  
148  
138  
138.  
141  
139  
Enable PDF417 truncation  
Enable or disable the beeper  
GS T n or X'1D;54;n'  
ESC BEL n1 n2 or X'1B;07;n1;n2'  
Enable or disable the feed buttons ESC c 5 n X'1B;63;35;n'  
Enable or disable two-color printing GS ; n or X'1D 3B n'  
Enable or disable upside-down  
printing  
ESC { n or X'1B 7B n'  
Erase flash EPROM sector  
Exercise program  
ESC # n or X'1B23;n'  
ESC x or X'1B;78'  
GS | or X'1D49;01'  
121  
107  
107  
Extended address  
command-request printer ID  
Fix font matrix  
ESC : n or X'1B 3A n'  
141  
121  
153  
Flash storage write  
ESC ’ n1 n2 data or X'1B27;n1;n2;data'  
ESC p m n1 n2 or X'1B70;m;n1;n2'  
Generate drive pulse for cash  
drawer  
Hold printing until buffer is released ESC 7 or X'1B37'  
157  
122  
Microcode tolerance (MCT)  
information - loading  
ESC M n h l or X'1B4D;n;h;l'  
Microcode tolerance (MCT)  
information - request  
ESC S n or X'1B53;n'  
123  
Paper cut/DI eject  
ESC i or ESC m or X'1B69' or X'1B;6D'  
153  
111  
Predefine messages  
GS : message_num data GS : or  
X'1D3A;message_num;data;1D3A'  
Print and feed paper n lines  
ESC d n or X'1B64;n'  
ESC J n or X'1B4A;n'  
149  
149  
Print and feed paper using  
minimum units  
Print and line feed  
Print and line feed  
Print bar code  
LF or X'0A'  
148  
149  
142  
141  
147  
151  
CR or X'0D'  
GS k n NUL or X'1D6B;n;data;00'  
GS J d n1 n2 data or X'1D 4A d n1 n2 data'  
GS P data NUL or X'1D;50;data;00'  
GS / m logo_num or X'1D2F;m;logo_num'  
Print logo inline  
Print PDF417 bar code  
Print predefined graphics (logo)  
command  
Print predefined messages  
GS ^ message_num or X'1D5E;message_num'  
152  
104 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Table 13. RS-232 Commands in Alphabetical Order (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
Print, form feed, and cut the paper FF or X'0C'.  
(FF)  
149  
Proportional font  
ESC & s n m data or X'1B;26;s;n;m;data'  
DLE ENQ m or X'1005n'  
114  
156  
Real-time requests  
n
Description  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
40  
41  
42  
43  
Release print buffer  
Cancel print buffer  
Undefined  
EC request; send status  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Undefined  
Reset printer  
Enable unsolicited status  
Disable unsolicited status  
Disable transparent XON/XOFF  
Reinitialize the printer  
Reset line count  
ESC @ or X'1B40'  
ESC 6 or X'1B36'  
X'1B 51 xx'  
137  
157  
154  
154  
154  
153  
Retrieve printer usage statistics  
Retrieve size of user flash storage ESC 4 x ’03 FF FF FF’ or X'1B;34;03;FF;FF;FF'  
Retrieve the flash storage  
ESC 4 n1 n2 or X'1B34;n1;n2'  
ESC < n or X'1B3C;n'  
Return home (select printhead  
location)  
Select and print a graphics (logo)  
command  
ESC * d w h data or X'1B2A;d;w;h;data'  
GS S r;c or X'1D;53;r;c'  
150  
148  
Select aspect ratio PDF417 bar  
code  
Select bar code height  
GS h n or X'1D68;n'  
146  
137  
140  
Select character for reprinted lines ESC + n or X'1B2B;n'  
Select character size for scaleable GS ! n or X'1D;21;n'  
fonts  
Select color printing  
ESC r n or X'1B;72;n'  
GS f n or X'1D66;n'  
132  
146  
145  
147  
146  
Select font for HRI  
Select horizontal size of bar code  
Select PDF417 ECC Level  
GS w n or X'1D77;n'  
GS R n or X'1D;52;n1;n2'  
GS H n or X'1D48;n'  
Select printing position of  
human-readable information (HRI)  
Select user-defined or resident  
character sets  
ESC % n or X'1B25;n'  
129  
131  
Select 1/6-inch line spacing  
ESC 2 or X'1B32'  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Table 13. RS-232 Commands in Alphabetical Order (continued)  
Description  
Command  
Page  
131  
Select 1/8-inch line spacing  
ESC 1 or X'1B31'  
ESC ″ n or X'1B22;n'  
Send checksum of flash EPROM  
sector  
122  
Set code page  
ESC t n or X'1B74;n'  
129  
135  
133  
129  
129  
Set error recovery function  
Set horizontal tab positions  
Set inter-character spacing  
ESC c 4 n or X'1B63;34;n'  
ESC D [n1 n2] NUL NUL or X'1B44[n1n2]0000'  
ESC SP n or X'1B20;n'  
Set inter-character spacing –  
ESC T n or X'1B;52;n'  
DBCS  
Set left margin position  
ESC $ n1 n2 or X'1B24;n1;n2'  
ESC 3 n or X'1B33;n'  
133  
132  
Set line spacing using minimum  
units  
Set or cancel double-high mode  
Set or cancel double-wide mode  
ESC h n or X'1B68;n'  
ESC W n or X'1B57;n'  
127  
126  
128  
128  
Set or cancel emphasized printing ESC G n or X'1B47;n'  
Set or cancel high quality print  
mode  
ESC / n or X'1B;2F;n'  
Set or cancel invert mode  
ESC H n or X'1B48;n'  
ESC x‘5F’ n or X'1B5F;n'  
ESC V n or X'1B56;n'  
ESC − n or X'1B2D;n'  
127  
127  
130  
127  
135  
125  
130  
128  
134  
133  
107  
137  
152  
113  
107  
Set or cancel overline mode  
Set or cancel rotated character  
Set or cancel underline mode  
Set or cancel unidirectional printing ESC U n or X'1B55;n'  
Set print mode  
ESC ! n or X'1B21;n'  
ESC c 1 n or X'1B63;31;n'  
ESC c 0 n or X'1B63;30;n'  
ESC \ n1 n2 or X'1B5C;n1;n2'  
ESC C n or X'1B43;n'  
ESC v or X'1B76'  
Set print station parameters  
Set print station  
Set relative position  
Set sheet eject length  
Status request  
Status sent to system  
Tab to next tab stop  
Thermal code page  
ESC ) n or X'1B29;n'  
HT or X'09'  
MCT commands  
Verify previous commands  
completed  
X'1B;00;80;00'  
106 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
System Commands  
Exercise Program  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC x or X'1B;78'  
Purpose:  
This tests printing functions of the printer. A test message is printed. (See  
Figure 26 on page 57.) If there is a document in the printer, the test  
message prints on the document. Otherwise, it prints at the customer  
receipt station.  
Error Conditions:  
Home Error (on document station only)  
Cash Receipt Print Error  
Verify Previous Commands Completed  
RS-232 Syntax:  
X'1B;00;80;00'  
Purpose:  
This command can be used to ensure that all commands preceding it have  
been completed. The application would just wait for the status return with  
status byte 5, bit 1 set.  
Remarks:  
The printer status is returned in status bytes 1–8. Status byte 5, bit 1 is set  
after this request has been executed. See “Status Summary” on page 160  
for more information.  
Error Conditions:  
None.  
Status Request  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC v or X'1B;76'  
Purpose:  
The printer status is sent to the system. This command will be processed in  
the order it was received.  
Remarks:  
The printer status is returned in status bytes 1–8. See “Status Summary” on  
page 160 for more information.  
Error Conditions:  
None.  
Extended Address Command – Request Printer ID  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS | SOH or X'1D;49;01'  
Purpose:  
This will return 8 bytes of printer status plus 5 bytes of printer-specific  
information.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Status byte 5, bit 0 is set to 1 when responding to the extended address  
command. (See “Status Summary” on page 160.)  
|
where:  
|
|
Byte 1  
Device type = 30  
|
|
Byte 2  
Device ID.  
|
|
00  
01  
02  
Models TI1 and TI2 (impact DI/thermal CR)  
Models TI3 and TI4  
|
|
Models TI5 and TG5, or Models TI3 and TI4 with 2-MB  
option  
|
|
|
|
|
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
Models TM6 and TF6 (512K; thermal CR)  
Models TI3 and TI4 with the 8-MB option  
Models TM6 and TF6 with the 8-MB option  
Reserved  
Models TF7 and TM7  
|
|
Byte 3  
Features.  
|
|
|
|
|
Bit 0 Set to 1 when MICR is present  
Bit 1 Set to 1 when check flipper is present  
Bit 2 Set to 1 when byte 2 is set to 02  
Bit 3 Set to 1 when printer is in XON/XOFF mode  
Bit 4 Set to 1 when printer is in DBCS mode  
|
|
Bit 5 Set to 1 when the 2-MB option is used for user flash  
memory, instead of being used for DBCS storage  
|
|
Bit 6 Set to 1 when the printer has capability of printing two  
colors.  
|
Bit 7 Set to 1 when the printer is in Model 4 emulation mode.  
|
|
Byte 4  
Byte 5  
Second byte of features  
|
|
Bit 0 Set to 1 when printer is setup for 58-mm paper. (Only valid  
for models TF7 and TM7.)  
|
|
EC level = EC level of loaded code  
Error Conditions:  
None.  
Remarks:  
This is an IMMEDIATE command.  
108 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Preset or Onetime-Set Commands  
The SureMark printer has commands to specialize and tune each printer to improve  
its usability, performance, and uniqueness. This flexibility is provided through the  
use of flash erasable programmable read-only memory (flash EPROM) and an  
electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM). Data in these  
memory devices will stay valid until it is redefined. This information only needs to be  
defined once because it will remain for the life of the printer or until it is redefined.  
To verify that data was previously stored in the printer, the system can request a  
checksum on data stored in each sector.  
Flash EPROM has 5 sectors. To rewrite information in a sector, you must first erase  
the sector.  
v For logo commands and predefined messages, erasing the sector is necessary  
only to replace a logo or predefined message number, or when the length of the  
logo or message exceeds space available in that sector.  
v For user flash memory, erasing the sector is necessary only when writing to an  
address that has already been written to.  
v For user-defined thermal and impact characters, new characters can be added if  
they have the same matrix as characters already in the character set. If new  
character sets are added, the flash memory does not have to be erased. To  
replace characters, you must first erase the sector.  
Sector Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Download graphics (logo) commands  
Predefined (canned) messages  
Two user-defined impact character sets  
User-defined thermal character sets – four fixed matrix or 2 proportional  
User flash memory  
DBCS character storage  
The EEPROM stores microcode tolerances (MCT) values.  
Download Graphics (Logo) Commands  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS * logo_num n1 n2 data or X'1D;2A;logo_num;n1;n2;data'  
where:  
logo_num  
The logo number being stored.  
1 ≤ logo_num ≤ 40  
n1  
One-eighth the number of dots in the horizontal direction (width = 8  
× n1).  
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 72 for a thermal logo.  
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 59 for an impact logo.  
n2  
One-eighth the number of dots in the vertical direction (height = 8 ×  
n2).  
1 ≤ n2 ≤ 255 for a thermal logo.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
1 ≤ n2 ≤ 5 for an impact logo.  
data  
The data to form the graphics image. The number of data bytes for  
the image is n1 × n2 × 8  
Purpose:  
To store all-points-addressable print messages.  
Remarks:  
These messages can be positioned on the page using the commands for  
setting positions.  
Decimal values are shown, but all parameter values (logo number, n1, n2)  
must be hex values when sent to the printer.  
The dot density of these messages is specified when the message is  
printed. See “Print Predefined Graphics (Logo) Command” on page 151.  
The total number of data bytes defined for all (up to 40) defined graphics  
messages must be less than 65 376.  
If the parameters logo_num, n1, or n2 are out of range, the command is  
discarded and its remaining data is processed as print data.  
This command should be sent only when the data buffer is empty. See the  
description of bit 6 in “Status Byte 2” on page 161.  
Images for the thermal logo commands will be defined by one-dot-high rows  
(horizontal slices), and the impact will be defined by eight-dot-high rows  
(vertical slices).  
Note: For a thermal graphic message that is 24 dots high, across the page (n1 =  
72, n2 = 3) takes over 2000 bytes of data.  
Example: n1 = 2 & n2 = 2  
For Thermal Graphics - Defined as:  
X'1D2A010202AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA  
55555555555555555555555555555555'  
110 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
For Impact Graphics - Defined as:  
X'1D2A020202FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00  
00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF00FF'  
Error Conditions:  
Flash EPROM load error - Verify the sector was erased before downloading  
images.  
Memory sector is full - The sector can store up to 64 KB of graphics data,  
after which the sector is full.  
Predefine Messages  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS : message_num data GS : or X'1D3A;message_num;data;1D3A'  
where:  
message_num  
The message number being stored.  
1 ≤ message_num ≤ 25  
data  
Purpose:  
All data and commands to be included in this message. No  
immediate commands can be included in the data.  
To store predefined messages. This cuts transmission time. This is where  
you can store the header and the trailer of receipts, for example.  
Remarks:  
v After a ″GS :″ occurs, all incoming commands are stored in the message  
until another ″GS :″ occurs.  
v “Print Predefined Graphics (Logo) Command” on page 151 can be  
included in this command.  
v The size of all predefined messages cannot exceed 8000 bytes.  
Example:  
Store a trailer message:  
X'1D3A01'  
’Thank You For Shopping’ X'0D'  
’ At RSD STORE’ X'0D'  
’Store #1234567’ X'0D'  
X'1D3A'  
This would store this message as predefined message 1. See “Print  
Predefined Messages” on page 152 for printing this trailer message.  
Commands for selecting the print station and print characteristics must be  
included with the stored message.  
Limitations:  
v “Print Predefined Graphics (Logo) Command” on page 151 can be  
included in this command. Select and print a graphics command cannot  
be used. See “Print Graphic Messages” on page 150.  
v “Print Predefined Messages” on page 152 can be included in this  
command, but can only be nested one message deep.  
Example: Store a predefined message (’Jane Doe’) at location 3, then  
issue the following commands:  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
1. X'1D3A06'  
2. ’Welcome to Our Store’ X'0D'  
3. X'1D5E03' (This prints the message that has been stored at location  
3. The message cannot have a X'1D5Exx' in it, because that would  
be more than one level of nesting.)  
4. ’Is Your Cashier Today’ X'0D'  
5. X'1D3A'  
Using the stored message and the above commands, the resulting text  
will be:  
Welcome to Our Store  
Jane Doe Is Your Cashier Today  
v These commands cannot be included in the predefined message:  
– “Define Document Wait Time” on page 136.  
– “Select Character for Reprinted Lines” on page 137.  
– “Set Sheet Eject Length” on page 133.  
– “Select and Print a Graphics (Logo) Command” on page 150.  
v This command should be sent only when the data buffer is empty. See  
the description of bit 6 in “Status Byte 2” on page 161.  
Error Conditions:  
Flash EPROM load error - Verify the sector was erased before downloading  
the messages.  
Memory sector is full - This sector can store up 8 KB of message data.  
After that the sector is full.  
Download User-Defined Characters  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC & s n m data or X'1B26;s;n;m;data'  
where:  
s
The character set being defined.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
User-defined thermal code page 1  
User-defined thermal code page 2  
User-defined thermal code page 3  
User-defined thermal code page 4  
User-defined impact code page 1  
User-defined impact code page 2  
n
The beginning ASCII address of the characters being defined.  
The ending ASCII address of the characters being defined.  
m
data  
The slice data for the defined characters. Note the number of bytes  
is determined by which code page is being defined and the  
character matrix of that code page.  
Purpose:  
To define a matrix pattern for user-definable code pages stored in flash  
EPROM.  
Remarks:  
112 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
v Once characters are downloaded to the printer, they remain valid until  
you redefine them. This is true even if power to the printer is removed.  
v Before the characters are defined, the sector of the flash EPROM which  
stores this data must be erased. (See “Erase Flash EPROM Sector” on  
page 121.) Also, the character matrix for the code page must have  
already been defined. (See Table 15 on page 123, MCT# 3, 4, and 5.)  
v Flash EPROM sector 4 contains all user-defined code pages for the  
thermal printhead. To redefine a code page, you must erase and  
reprogram all of them.  
v Flash EPROM sector 3 contains both user-defined code pages for the  
impact printhead. To redefine a code page, you must erase and  
reprogram both of them.  
v Thermal height must be even.  
v There is no way to redefine one character only. You must redefine a  
whole code page.  
v If the parameter s, n, or m is out of range, the command is discarded  
and the remaining data is processed as print data.  
v This command should be sent only when the data buffer is empty. See  
the description of bit 6 in “Status Byte 2” on page 161.  
v ASCII characters 0 through 31 are reserved for RS-232 functions and  
cannot be defined.  
Thermal Code Page  
You define the character matrix for each code page with MCT #2, MCT #3, MCT  
#23, and MCT #24 for thermal code pages 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See  
Table 15 on page 123.  
The number of data bytes per character loaded is 2 × the character height. The  
total number of data bytes for this command is 2 × the character height × (1+m−n).  
Example: 10 wide × 20 high  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Defined as:  
X'1B26014848 C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0FFC0FFC0F  
C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0C0'  
The above statement defines character X'48' as an ’H’.  
Note: The number of data bytes = 2 × dot height (20) = 40 bytes.  
Proportional Font  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC & s n m data or X'1B;26;s;n;m;data'  
where:  
s
The character set being defined.  
1
3
User-defined thermal code page 1.  
User-defined thermal code page 3.  
n
The beginning ASCII address of the characters being defined.  
The ending ASCII address of the characters being defined.  
m
data  
The height and width of the character, and the matrix pattern for the  
data. The number of data bytes is (m−n+1) × (2+wb×32). wb is  
defined in the MCT command.  
Purpose:  
To download and print proportional fonts (True Type fonts) in the thermal  
station. Each character in the code page has its own unique width and  
height. The matrix must be within the following ranges:  
Width 8 ≤ width ≤ 32  
Height  
8 ≤ width ≤ 32  
Remarks:  
v Proportional and standard fonts may be used on the same line. If both  
types of fonts are used on a line, you would probably use proportional  
fonts for the description and resident fonts for the amounts.  
v For alignment, a command that will allow right and left alignment on the  
same line may be used. This will allow the user to align a column  
(decimal point) on the right, and still be left-aligned. (See “Align  
Positions” on page 134.)  
v Once characters are downloaded to the printer, they remain valid until  
you redefine them. This is true even if power to the printer is removed.  
v Before the characters are defined, the sector of the flash EPROM which  
stores this data must be erased. (See “Erase Flash EPROM Sector” on  
page 121.)  
v There is no way to redefine one character only. You must redefine a  
whole code page.  
v If the parameter s, n, or m is out of range, the command is discarded  
and the remaining data is processed as print data.  
v This command should be sent only when the data buffer is empty. See  
the description of bit 6 in “Status Byte 2” on page 161.  
114 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
v ASCII characters 0 through 31 are reserved for RS-232 functions and  
cannot be defined.  
v See Appendix E, “Proportional Fonts” on page 165 for suggestions about  
how to implement proportional fonts.  
Limitations:  
The memory required for proportional fonts is much greater than the  
memory that was required for user-defined fonts. Therefore, when code  
page 1 (or 3) is set up as proportional, code page 2 (or 4) is not valid.  
You cannot set up code page 2 or code page 4 as a proportional font.  
To download the font:  
1. Store the code page matrix as an MCT value. Use the command X'1B  
4D x 55 wb' where:  
x
X'02' for thermal code page 1, X'17' for thermal code page 3  
wb  
The number of bytes, which is also 1⁄8 the number of dots, in  
the width of the widest character. The valid range is 2≤wb≤4.  
2. Erase the existing character set using the command X'1B 23 04'.  
3. Use the Proportional Font command to download the font.  
Example:  
To define an A to code page 1 when wb is set to 02, enter the following:  
X'1B260141410C16'  
X'0F001F803FC070E06060C030C030C030C030C030C030'  
X'C030FFF0FFF0C030C030C030C030C030C030C030'  
X'C030000000000000000000000000000000000000000000'  
This command specifies a character width of 12 dots (X'0C') and a  
character height of 22 dots (X'16'). Following the width and height are 64  
bytes that define the character. If, as in this case, the character is defined  
before all 64 bytes have been used, the rest of the bytes are filled with X'0'  
(see Figure 42 on page 116).  
Note: If wb were set to 03, then the total number of data bytes would be  
98 (3×32+2)  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
row #  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0000111100000000  
0001111110000000  
0011111111000000  
0111000011100000  
0110000001100000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1111111111110000  
1111111111110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
1100000000110000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0000000000000000  
0F00  
1F80  
3FC0  
70E0  
6060  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
FFF0  
FFF0  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
C030  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
0000000000000000  
0000  
32  
Figure 42. Proportional Font Example  
Impact Code Page  
You define the character matrix for each code page with MCT #4 for impact code  
page 1 and MCT #5 for impact code page 2. See Table 15 on page 123.  
If the matrix defines the characters as 9 dots high or less, a print line will be printed  
in one pass of the printhead. When the matrix is defined as greater than 9 dots  
high, it takes two passes of the printhead per print line.  
Landscape printing is limited to characters with a height of 9 dots or less. If  
user-defined characters are to be used in landscape print mode, they must be less  
than 10 dots high.  
The number of data bytes per character loaded is 2 × character width. The total  
number of data bytes for this command is 2 × character width × (1+m−n). Each  
slice is defined with two bytes; the most significant bit (MSB) of each slice is the  
bottom of the character.  
When defining wire patterns, the same wire does not fire in consecutive, primary (P)  
and secondary (S) positions. (The printer does not check for errors in defining the  
character.) If the character is defined with dots in consecutive positions only one of  
the dots is fired.)  
116 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Example: 11 half-dots wide (or 5.5 full dots) × 9 high  
Defined as:  
X'1B26034141FO00080014000200110000081100020014000800F000'  
The above statement defines character X'41' as an ‘A’.  
Note: The number of data bytes = 2 × dot width (11) = 22 bytes.  
Error Conditions:  
Flash EPROM load error - Verify the sector was erased before downloading  
images.  
Download Double-Byte Characters  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC ( s n data or X'1B;28;s;n;data'  
where:  
s
The character set being defined.  
0
1
Character set for the thermal station (must be 24x24 matrix)  
Character set for the impact station (must be either 16x16  
matrix or 9x16 matrix)  
n
The number of characters being downloaded.  
data  
The address of the character being loaded (2 bytes) followed by the  
character data.  
v For the impact station, there are 32 bytes per character – 2 bytes  
for each slice (dot wide). The total number of data bytes = n *  
34.  
v For the thermal station, there are 72 bytes per character – 3  
bytes for each row (dot high). The total number of data bytes = n  
* 74.  
Purpose:  
To define a matrix pattern for double-byte characters stored in the flash  
EPROM.  
Remarks:  
v Once the characters are downloaded to the printer, they will remain valid  
until the user redefines them. This is true even if you power off the  
printer.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
v You must erase the sector of the flash EPROM where this data is stored  
before you define the characters. (See “Erase Flash EPROM Sector” on  
page 121.) You must also predefine the character matrix for the impact  
DBCS code. (See “Microcode Tolerance (MCT) Information - Request” on  
page 123.)  
v The flash EPROM sector 6 contains the double-byte character set for  
both the thermal and impact printheads. To redefine a character for an  
address that is already downloaded, you must erase and reprogram all  
double-byte characters.  
v To define a character for an address that is not yet downloaded, you can  
download a character using this command.  
v The inter-character spacing should not be included in the character  
matrix – it is set by a different command.  
v The address range that can be defined is shown in Table 14.  
Table 14. Address Ranges for DBCS Code Pages  
Code Page  
Address Range  
Total Characters  
1880  
932 – Japan  
First byte: F0–F9; second byte:  
40–7E, 80–FC (for example:  
F040–F07E, F080–F0FC, ...  
F940–F97E, F980–F9FC)  
949 – Korea  
C9A1–C9FE, FEA1–FEFE  
FA40–FA7E, FAA1–FAFE  
188  
157  
950 – Traditional Chinese  
1381 – Simplified Chinese  
First byte: 8D-A0; second byte: A1–FE 1880  
(for example: 8DA1–8DFE,  
8EA1–8EFE, ... A0A1–A0FE)  
Thermal Printhead (s=0)  
The height and width of these characters are always 24 dots = 3 mm. The first two  
data bytes specify the address of the character being defined. Starting from the  
third data byte, the data bytes contain the character matrix information consisting of  
three bytes per row for 24 rows.  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
118 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
For example:  
Data that defines a character at X'8141' as a large box is:  
X’1B;28;00;01;81;41;FF;FF;FF;FF;FF;FF;  
C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;  
C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;  
C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;C0;00;03;  
C0;00;03;C0;00;03;FF;FF;FF;FF;FF;FF’  
Impact Printhead (s=1)  
The width of these characters is always 16. However, the height of the impact  
printhead, which is defined by MCT #1 (see “Microcode Tolerance (MCT)  
Information - Request” on page 123), is defined as 9 or 16.  
The first two data bytes specify the address of the character being defined. Starting  
from the third data byte, the data bytes contain the slice information. Each slice  
contains two data bytes.  
The printer does not check the height of the downloaded character at the time of  
the image download.  
Example of 9 x 16 printing:  
When the code page is set for the 9x16 matrix:  
v The characters are printed in one pass of the printhead.  
v The characters must follow the rules of the impact printhead; the same wire  
cannot fire in consecutive positions; primary (P) and secondary (S). The printer  
will not check for character definition errors. If the character is defined with dots  
in consecutive positions, only one of the dots will be fired.  
v The height of these characters is 2.2 mm. The width of the characters is 2.7 mm  
when printed at 150 half-dots per inch (15 cpi), and 3.4 mm when printed at 120  
half-dots per inch (12 cpi).  
In the tables below:  
0
.
The ″don’t care″ dot positions whose data will not be printed.  
The position where the dot will not be printed.  
The position where the dot will be printed.  
X
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
S
0
P
0
S
0
P
0
S
0
P
0
S
0
P
0
S
0
P
0
S
0
P
0
S
0
P
0
S
0
P
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
.
X
.
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
X
X
X
X
.
X
.
X
X
X
.
X
. . . . . . . . . . . . .  
X
.
.
. . . . . . . .  
X
.
X
.
.
.
.
X
X
. . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . .  
X
.
.
X
.
.
.
.
.
X
. . . . . . . . . . . . .  
X
.
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
X
.
X
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
.
.
X
X
X
X
X
X
For example:  
Data that defines a character at X'8141' as a large box is:  
X’1B;28;01;01;81;41;55;00;AA;80;41;00;  
80;80;41;00;80;80;41;00;80;80;41;00;80;80;41;00;80;80;41;00;  
80;80;55;00;AA;80’  
Example of 16 x 16 printing:  
When the code page is set for the 16x16 matrix:  
v A character is printed in two passes of the printhead. The top 8 rows are printed  
on the first pass of the printhead and the bottom 8 rows are printed on the  
second pass for bi-directional printing.  
v The printer prints these characters only at the primary positions of the impact  
print head. The secondary positions will be left blank.  
v The height of these characters is 4 mm. The width of the characters is 5.4 mm  
when printed at 150 half-dots per inch (15 cpi), and 6.8 mm when printed at 120  
half-dots per inch (12 cpi).  
v Landscape printing is not allowed.  
For example: Data that defines a character at X'8141' as a large box is:  
X’1B;28;01;01;81;41;FF;FF;FF;FF; C0;03;C0;03;C0;03;C0;03;C0;03;C0;03;  
C0;03;C0;03;C0;03;C0;03;C0;03;C0;03;FF;FF;FF;FF’  
120 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Flash Storage Write  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC ’ m add data or X'1B;27;m;add;data'  
where:  
m
= number of data bytes to store  
= 3-byte address where data bytes are to be stored  
Add  
Error Conditions:  
Flash EPROM load error - Verify the sector was erased before downloading  
images.  
Remarks:  
The valid address range for each SureMark depends on the model number  
and which memory option, if any, is installed. Use “Retrieve Size of User  
Flash Storage” on page 154 to determine the valid range for your printer.  
The command is rejected when the address is out of range.  
|
|
The flash EPROM is guaranteed for a minimum life of 100,000 write/erase  
commands by the Flash manufacturer.  
Erase Flash EPROM Sector  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC # n or X'1B;23;n'  
where:  
n =  
01  
02  
03  
04  
Sector 1 - downloaded graphics  
Sector 2 - predefined messages  
Sector 3 - user-defined impact character set  
Sector 4 - user-defined thermal character sets  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
05  
Sector 5 - flash storage  
06  
Sector 6 - DBCS character storage  
07 - FF  
Reserved  
Purpose:  
To erase the flash EPROM before downloading the data into the printer.  
Remarks:  
The command should only be sent to the printer when the buffer is empty  
(status byte 2, bit 6). No other commands should be sent until this  
command is complete.  
Status byte 3, bit 7 (command complete bit) is set to show erasing is  
finished and the command is complete.  
|
|
The flash EPROM is guaranteed for a minimum life of 100,000 write/erase  
commands by the Flash manufacturer.  
Send Checksum of Flash EPROM Sector  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC ″ n or X'1B;22;n'  
where:  
n =  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
Sector 1 - downloaded graphics  
Sector 2 - predefined messages  
Sector 3 - user-defined impact character set  
Sector 4 - user-defined thermal character sets  
Sector 5 - flash storage  
Thermal double-byte character sets  
Impact double-byte character sets  
Purpose:  
To verify data integrity of the data loaded in the flash EPROM in the printer.  
A 2-byte checksum is returned.  
Microcode Tolerance (MCT) Information - Loading  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC M n h l or X'1B;4D;n;h;l'  
122 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
where:  
n
h
l
Microcode tolerance (MCT) that is being adjusted  
The high-order byte of MCT data  
The low-order byte of MCT data  
Purpose:  
The microcode tolerance (MCT) information is used to make adjustments to  
the printer’s microcode. MCT data is nonvolatile data stored in the printer  
EPROM that is specific to a printer. For example, an MCT parameter can  
be defined to adjust for mechanical tolerances which cause a print line to  
not be centered on a receipt. Another would be for adjusting for the number  
of motor steps to the first print position on a document. This data remains  
intact until changed by the user.  
Remarks:  
Table 15 lists the MCT values by the parameter (n). The table includes the  
default, the minimum, and the maximum values of each MCT.  
If you try to set an MCT value out of its defined range, it is set to the  
closest limit (the minimum or maximum value) or rejected.  
Error Conditions:  
EPROM load error  
Microcode Tolerance (MCT) Information - Request  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC S n or X'1B;53;n'  
where:  
n
Microcode tolerance (MCT) information that is being requested  
Purpose:  
To enable reading microcode tolerance (MCT) information from EEPROM.  
Remarks:  
v MCT data is sent over the serial line in status bytes 9 and 10. See  
Table 15 for the values of parameter n.  
v MCT write command values that are out of range cause the command to  
be rejected. (See bit 7 of “Status Byte 1” on page 160.)  
Table 15. MCT Command Definitions  
DEC  
HEX  
MCT  
Default  
Min  
Max  
1
1
DBCS code page  
Byte 1: Reserved, set to X'FF'  
X'FF00'  
X'FF00'  
X'FF01'  
Byte 2: Matrix for the impact code  
page  
v 0 = 16 x 16 code page  
v 1 = 9 x 19 code page  
2
2
Matrix of user-defined thermal code  
page 1  
X'0A14'  
(10x20)  
X'0810'  
X'1020'  
(16x32)  
Byte 1: Dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Table 15. MCT Command Definitions (continued)  
DEC  
HEX  
MCT  
Default  
Min  
Max  
3
3
Matrix of user-defined thermal code  
page 2  
X'0A14'  
X'0810'  
X'1020'  
(10x20)  
(16x32)  
Byte 1: Dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
4
5
4
5
Matrix of user-defined impact code  
page 1  
X'0707'  
(07x07)  
X'0404'  
X'0404'  
X'1010'  
(16x16)  
Byte 1: Half-dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
Matrix of user-defined impact code  
page 2  
X'0707'  
(07x07)  
X'1010'  
(16x16)  
Byte 1: Half-dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
6-22  
23  
6-16  
17  
Reserved - IMPORTANT: Changing these values might damage the printer.  
Matrix of user-defined thermal code  
page 3  
X'0A14'  
(10x20)  
X'0810'  
X'0810'  
N/A  
X'1020'  
(16x32)  
Byte 1: Dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
24  
30  
19  
1E  
Matrix of user-defined thermal code  
page 4  
X'0A14'  
(10x20)  
X'1020'  
(16x32)  
Byte 1: Dot row width  
Byte 2: Dot row height  
RS-232 options  
X'FFFF'  
N/A  
Bit 13: (DI portrait mode only)  
v 1 = Line feeds NOT  
executed until DI ready.  
(Epson Mode)  
v 0 = Line feeds are executed  
without regard for the state  
of DI ready. (IBM mode)  
Bit 14:  
v 1 = Normal operations  
v 0 = Switch order of font A/B  
Bit 15:  
v 0 = Disable CR, 0D hex in  
CR station. No line feeds in  
DI.  
v 1 = Normal operations.  
31-50  
51  
1F-32  
33  
Reserved - IMPORTANT: Changing these values might damage the printer.  
DBCS address vector 1  
DBCS address vector 2  
DBCS address vector 3  
X'80FF'  
X'0000'  
X'0000'  
X'0000'  
X'0000'  
X'0000'  
X'FFFF'  
X'FFFF'  
X'FFFF'  
52  
34  
53  
35  
54-127 36-FF  
Reserved - IMPORTANT: Changing these values might damage the printer.  
124 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
DBCS Address Vectors  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC S n or X'1B;53;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the DBCS address vector.  
v 33 for address vector 1  
v 34 for address vector 2  
v 35 for address vector 3  
Purpose:  
To determine the address ranges that are assumed for the DBCS and  
SBCS code pages.  
Remarks:  
v The DBCS address vector value is sent over the serial line in status  
bytes 9 and 10.  
v The vector ranges should be stored in the printer at the time of  
download.  
v All ranges are for DBCS addresses. SBCS addresses are assumed to be  
those outside the defined vector ranges.  
v The unused vector ranges are set to 00,00.  
Example:  
Assume there will be 2 vector ranges required: 82–9F and E9–FC. An  
example of how print data is interpreted follows.  
Hex data sent:  
″89;30;E9;A0;A0;40;41;82;41;0A″  
Interpreted as:  
v 8930 from the DBCS code page  
v E9A0 from the DBCS code page  
v A0, 40, and 41 from the SBCS code page  
v 8241 from the DBCS code page  
v 0A is an end of line and line feed command.  
Setup Commands  
Setup commands change character font, inter-character spacing, and the target  
print station.  
Set Print Mode  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC ! n or X'1B;21;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies print characteristics, such as user-defined thermal and  
impact code pages.  
Bit # ↓ Function  
LSB 0 Char/Page 0  
1 Char/Page 1  
2 Overline  
Bit=0  
Bit=1  
Thermal  
yes  
yes  
Impact  
yes  
yes  
See Below  
See Below  
Cancel  
See Below  
See Below  
Set  
yes  
no  
3 Emphasized  
Cancel  
Set  
yes  
yes  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Bit # ↓ Function  
4 Double-high  
5 Double-wide  
6 Inverted Mode  
MSB 7 Underlined  
Bit=0  
Bit=1  
Set  
Set  
Set  
Set  
Thermal  
Impact  
yes  
yes  
no  
no  
Cancel  
Cancel  
Cancel  
Cancel  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
Table 16. Fonts for Models TI5, TG5, TF7, and TM7  
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
User-Defined Thermal  
Code Page  
User-Defined Impact Code  
Page @ Density  
Resident Thermal Resident  
Impact  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Code Page 1  
Code Page 2  
Code Page 3  
Code Page 4  
Code Page 1 @ 150 half-dots  
per inch  
Font A  
Font A  
Font B  
Font A  
Font B  
Code Page 1 @ 120 half-dots  
per inch  
Font B  
Code Page 2 @ 150 half-dots  
per inch  
Font C  
Reserved  
Code Page 2 @ 120 half-dots  
per inch  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
v For thermal printing with resident character sets:  
Font A = 10-dots (wide) × 20 dots (high) or 1.25 mm × 2.5 mm  
Font B = 12-dots (wide) × 24 dots (high) or 1.5 mm × 3.0 mm  
Font C = 8-dots (wide) × 16 dots (high) or 1.0 mm × 2.0 mm  
v For impact printing:  
Font A = dot density of 150 half-dots per inch (resident characters = 1.2  
mm × 2.5 mm).  
Font B = dot density of 120 half-dots per inch (resident characters = 1.5  
mm × 2.5 mm).  
Emphasized printing enable and disable, and font A or font B selection  
must be at the beginning of a print line to be recognized.  
User-defined characters greater than 9 dots high cannot be printed  
double high in landscape mode.  
Double-high and emphasized characters are not valid in landscape  
mode.  
v Invert cannot be used with overline or underline.  
v See “Character Fonts” on page 93, “Download User-Defined Characters”  
on page 112, “Set Print Station” on page 128, and “Select User-Defined  
or Resident Character Sets” on page 129 for related information.  
Example:  
Print mode set to font B, emphasized and underlined enabled (n = 89 hex).  
Set or Cancel Double-Wide Mode  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC W n or X'1B;57;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel double-wide mode  
126 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
n=01 Set double-wide mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Set or Cancel Double-High Mode  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC h n or X'1B;68;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel double-high mode  
n=01 Set double-high mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Purpose:  
For better print quality with double-high characters in the document station.  
Remarks:  
See “Set or Cancel Unidirectional Printing” on page 135.  
Set or Cancel Underline Mode  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC − n or X'1B;2D;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel underline mode  
n=01 Set underline mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This is valid in the customer receipt station only.  
Set or Cancel Overline Mode  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC x‘5F’ n or X'1B;5F;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel overline mode  
n=01 Set overline mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This is valid in the customer receipt station only.  
Set or Cancel Invert Mode  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC H n or X'1B;48;n'  
where:  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
n=00 Cancel Invert Mode  
n=01 Set Invert Mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This is valid in the customer receipt station only.  
Set or Cancel Emphasized Printing  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC G n or X'1B;47;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel Emphasized Mode  
n=01 Set Emphasized Mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This must be at the beginning of a print-line in the document portrait station.  
It is enabled for the entire line.  
Set or Cancel High Quality Print Mode  
RS-485 Syntax:  
X'1B;2F;n'  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC n or X'1B;2F;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel high quality mode  
n=01 Set high quality mode  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
When high quality mode is set, the printing will slow down to one-half speed  
in the cash receipt station. The slower speed increases the quality of the  
printing.  
Set Print Station  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC c 0 n or X'1B;6330;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the print station.  
Bit # ↓ Station  
LSB 0 Reserved  
1 Customer Receipt Station  
2 Document Station - Portrait Mode  
3 Document Station - Landscape Mode  
128 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
4 Reserved  
5 Reserved  
6 Reserved  
7 Reserved  
Default:  
n = 02  
Remarks:  
See “Document Handling” on page 157.  
Only one station can be set at a time. If you select more than one station,  
the command is ignored.  
Select User-Defined or Resident Character Sets  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC % n or X'1B;25;n'  
where:  
n=00 Select resident character sets  
n=01 Select user-defined character sets  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
See “Character Fonts” on page 93 and “Download User-Defined  
Characters” on page 112.  
Set Code Page  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC t n or X'1B;74;n'  
where:  
n=00 Code Page 437 - United States  
n=01 Code Page 858 - Multilingual  
n=02 Code Page 863 - Canadian-French  
n=03 Code Page 860 - Portugal  
n=04 Code Page 865 - Norway  
n=05 Printer’s Generic Code Page  
Default:  
n = 01  
Remarks:  
Changing code pages is valid only for resident single-byte character sets.  
Double-byte character sets must be downloaded. If user-defined character  
sets are enabled, this command will not do anything.  
Set Inter-Character Spacing  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC SP n or X'1B20;n'  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
where:  
n
The number of dot-spaces in the thermal print station or half-dot  
spaces in the impact print station.  
Default:  
n = 03  
Maximum:  
n = 08  
Remarks:  
If you select double-width printing, the space to the right of each character  
is doubled.  
Set Inter-Character Spacing – DBCS  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC T n or X'1B;52;n'  
where:  
n
The number of dot-spaces in the thermal print station or half-dot  
spaces in the impact print station.  
Default:  
n = 06  
Maximum:  
n = 20 hex (32 decimal)  
Remarks:  
If you select double-width printing, the spacing on the right side of each  
character is doubled.  
Set or Cancel Rotated Characters  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC V n or X'1B56;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancel Rotated Characters  
n=01 Set Rotated Character  
n=02 Code Page 863 - Canadian-French  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
Rotation is 90 degrees clockwise. This command is supported only in the  
thermal print station.  
Set Print Station Parameters  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC c 1 n or X'1B6331;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the print station.  
Bit # ↓ Station  
130 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
LSB 0 Reserved  
1 Customer Receipt Station  
2 Document Station - Portrait Mode  
3 Document Station - Landscape Mode  
4 Reserved  
5 Reserved  
6 Reserved  
7 Reserved  
Purpose:  
This command is used for setting the line spacing, margins, and tabs.  
Remarks:  
More than one station can be selected at the same time if the settings are  
common to all of the selected stations.  
Default:  
n = 02 (customer receipt station)  
Select 1/8-Inch Line Spacing  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC 1 or X'1B31'  
Remarks:  
In the thermal (receipt) station this would set line feeding to 25 steps/line.  
In the impact (document - portrait) station this would be set to 6 steps/line.  
In the impact (document - landscape) station this would be set to 16  
steps/line.  
This command should be sent after “Set Print Station Parameters” on  
page 130.  
Note: For DI portrait printing, characters having a height of more than 9  
dots (DBCS 16x16 dots) require a two-pass print, with paper fed  
in-between the lines (4 steps). The actual lines-per-inch will be  
adjusted. For example, if the printer is set to 1/6-inch line spacing,  
the printer will line feed 8 steps in-between each line, and the 4  
steps inside of the line. The result is 10 steps per line or 4 lines per  
inch.  
Select 1/6-Inch Line Spacing  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC 2 or X'1B32'  
Remarks:  
In the thermal (receipt) station this would set line feeding to 34 steps/line.  
In the impact (document - portrait) station this would be set to 8 steps/line.  
In the impact (document - landscape) station this would be set to 21  
steps/line.  
This command should be sent after “Set Print Station Parameters” on  
page 130.  
Note: For DI portrait printing, characters having a height of more than 9  
dots (DBCS 16x16 dots) require a two-pass print, with paper fed  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
in-between the lines (4 steps). The actual lines-per-inch will be  
adjusted. For example, if the printer is set to 1/6-inch line spacing,  
the printer will line feed 8 steps in-between each line, and the 4  
steps inside of the line. The result is 12 steps per line or 4 lines per  
inch.  
Select Color Printing  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC r n or X'1B;72;n;'  
where:  
n =  
00  
01  
02  
Cancel color printing  
Enable full-character color printing  
Enable half-character color printing  
Default:  
n = 00  
Purpose:  
To enable half-character or full-character color printing, or to disable color  
printing.  
Remarks:  
v You can enable and disable full-character color printing within a print line.  
This enables you to print one word in a different color.  
v This command can be used up to 8 times in a line when full-character  
color printing is used.  
v Half-character color printing is only supported at the beginning of a print  
line.  
v If both bit 1 and bit 0 of n are set (n=03), only half-character color  
printing will be enabled.  
Limitations:  
v This command is only valid if the Enable Color Printing command (see  
“Enable or Disable Two-Color Printing” on page 141) is sent first.  
v When color paper is enabled, depending on the paper, the printer might  
be limited to printing at 15 lps when printing 8 lpi.  
Set Line Spacing Using Minimum Units  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC 3 n or X'1B33;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies line feed steps.  
In the customer receipt station, 1 inch = 204 steps and 1 mm = 8  
steps. Thermal must be an even number.  
In the document portrait station, 1 inch = 48 steps and 1 mm = 1.9  
steps.  
In the document landscape station, 1 inch = 127 steps and 1 mm =  
5 steps.  
132 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Set Sheet Eject Length  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC C n or X'1B43;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the number of line feed steps using minimum units moved  
when a FF is sent in the receipt station.  
In the document station, an eject will feed until the document has  
exited the lower document sensors - this length is not used.  
Default:  
n = X'A0' (160 decimal)  
Maximum:  
255 steps (X'FF')  
This value is stored in the EEPROM in the printer so that it is not lost when the  
printer is reset.  
Set Horizontal Tab Positions  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC D [n1 n2] NUL NUL or X'1B44[n1n2]0000'  
where:  
n1  
n2  
The high-order-byte dot offset for the horizontal tab.  
The low-order-byte dot offset for the horizontal tab.  
Default:  
There is a tab every 100 dots.  
Remarks:  
This command should be sent after “Set Print Station Parameters” on  
page 130.  
Up to 5 tab positions can be stored. All 5 n1 n2 value pairs can be included  
in one command. Values must be entered in hex.  
A tab is calculated from the left margin position.  
Tab values must be in ascending order.  
Example: To set 3 tab positions - at the 100, 150 and 300 dot positions:  
v X'1B4400640096012C0000'  
See “Tab to Next Tab Stop” on page 152.  
Set Left Margin Position  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC $ n1 n2 or X'1B24;n1;n2'  
where:  
n1  
n2  
The high-order byte of the dot offset from the beginning of the print  
line.  
The low-order byte of the dot offset from the beginning of the print  
line.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Default:  
n1 = 0, n2 = 0  
Remarks:  
In the customer receipt station, 1 mm = 8 dots.  
In the document station, 1 inch = 150 half-dots (75 dots).  
n1 and n2 are hex values. Use this formula to get the decimal equivalent:  
(n1 × 256) + n2.  
If the number exceeds the printable area, it is ignored.  
The maximum value for the customer receipt station is 576. The maximum  
value for the document insert station is 474.  
In the customer receipt station, this number is rounded back to a factor of  
8.  
This command should be sent after “Set Print Station Parameters” on  
page 130.  
Set Relative Position  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC <5C>h n1 n2 or X'1B5C;n1;n2'  
where:  
n1  
n2  
Default:  
n1 = 0, n2 = 0  
Remarks:  
In the thermal station, 1 mm = 8 dots.  
The high-order byte of the dot offset from the left margin.  
The low-order byte of the dot offset from the left margin.  
In the impact station, 1 in. = 75-dots (150 half-dots).  
n1 and n2 are hex values. Use this formula to get the decimal equivalent:  
(n2 × 256) + n1  
To move the position to the left, use a negative number.  
Example: To move N dots to the right ⇒ 65536 − N.  
If this number plus the left margin exceeds the printable area it is ignored.  
See “Set Left Margin Position” on page 133.  
In the customer receipt station, this number is rounded back to a factor of  
8.  
Align Positions  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC a n or X'1B61;n'  
where:  
n=00 Align Left  
n=01 Align Center  
n=02 Align Right  
134 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
04  
Align Column Right  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
v Values 00, 01, and 02 are only valid at the beginning of a line.  
v Tabs are only valid when printing is aligned to the left. If tabs are used  
when left alignment is not used, results can be unpredictable. (See “Tab  
to Next Tab Stop” on page 152.)  
v Alignment is relative to the left margin.  
v To use the Align Column Right command:  
1. Send the characters that you want to be left aligned.  
2. Send the Align Column Right command.  
3. Send the characters that you want to be right aligned.  
4. Send an end of line command, for example X'0A' or X'0D'.  
The printer will return to left aligned after the line is printed.  
Limitations for n=04:  
v The command is only valid in the cash receipt station.  
v The command is ignored if the printer is not left aligned when the  
command is received.  
v If the Align Column Right command is received but the line is filled  
before an EOL is received, the filled line is treated as an EOL. There are  
usually a few dot positions available, but not enough for a full character.  
The column alignment will occur on the few dot positions available.  
Set or Cancel Unidirectional Printing  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC U n or X'1B55;n'  
where:  
n=00 Cancels unidirectional printing  
n=01 Sets unidirectional printing  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
This is valid in the document station in portrait mode only, when there must  
be two passes of the printhead to print one print line.  
Example: double-high or emphasized print.  
When unidirectional mode is set to double-high characters, it takes three  
passes of the printhead.  
In bidirectional mode, printing double-high characters takes only two passes  
of the printhead.  
Unidirectional printing takes longer but increases the quality of the print.  
Set Error Recovery Function  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC c 4 n or X'1B63;34;n'  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
where:  
n
Selects the function.  
Bit # ↓ Function  
LSB 0 Reserved  
1 Reserved  
Bit=0  
N/A  
N/A  
Bit=1  
N/A  
N/A  
2 Release Print Buffer after Error  
Release  
Hold  
Correction  
32 Automatic retry on a Home Error  
4 Hold buffer when waiting for a  
document  
Enabled  
Release  
Not Enabled  
Hold  
5 Hold buffer after a flip error  
Release  
Hold  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
When set to not automatically release the print buffer after error correction  
(bit #2), the printer does not execute commands until it receives a  
“Real-Time Requests” on page 156 command to cancel or release the print  
buffer.  
When automatic retry on a home error is selected, the printer will try to  
reset the printhead to a known location, then reprint the line on which the  
error occurred. If the printer is unable to reset the printhead, operator  
intervention is needed.  
An error will be sent back to the system and the LED will blink.  
Define Document Wait Time  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC f x y or X'1B66;x;y'  
where:  
x
Time the printer should wait, from receiving a print line for the  
document station until the document is inserted.  
If the document has not been detected by the time the wait time  
ends, a document error is sent to the system. The system continues  
to wait for a document to be inserted.  
Wait Time = x * 0.5 seconds  
y
Delay from the time the document is detected until it is grabbed by  
the printer (start of document printing):  
v Side insertion - closes the document throat.  
v Front insertion - pulls the document into the printer and feeds it  
to its top of form.  
Delay = y × 0.1 seconds  
Defaults:  
x = 02 y = 03  
Remarks:  
If y = 0, the printer does not grab the document. The operator must use the  
document feed button to pull the document into the printer.  
If x = 0, the printer never sends error status if no print data is sent to the  
document station.  
136 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
This value is stored in the EEPROM in the printer so that it is not lost when  
the printer is reset.  
Status Sent to System  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC ) n or X'1B29;n'  
where:  
n
Select function.  
Bit # ↓ Function  
LSB 0 Print Buffer Empty/Full  
1 Reserved  
Bit=0  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Bit=1  
No  
No  
No  
No  
2 Front Document Sensor Change  
3 Top Document Sensor Change  
4 After status byte 6 is incremented or Yes  
status byte 3, bit 7, is set  
No  
5 Cash Draw Sensor Change  
6 Key In Use  
7 Cover Open  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
Remarks:  
Bit 4 can be used in place of the Command Complete. When the buffer is  
empty, the system can assume that everything stored in the printer has  
been completed. To enable these status messages, unsolicited status must  
be enabled. See “Asynchronous (Real-Time) Commands” on page 155.  
Select Character for Reprinted Lines  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC + n or X'1B2B;n'  
where:  
n
The ASCII representation of the character printed in the first  
character position on the print line when recovering from a home  
error. This occurs in impact print stations only.  
Default:  
n = X'2A' (This is an asterisk (*) in most code pages.)  
Remarks:  
The value is stored in EEPROM to prevent loss when the printer is reset.  
The default value after the reset is the value last sent.  
Reinitialize the Printer  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC @ or X'1B40'  
Purpose:  
Reinitialize all printer settings to their default values and reset the impact  
printhead.  
Remarks:  
Commands in the print buffer are not lost when this command is issued.  
The settings that are reinitialized follow (all numbers are in hex):  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Setting  
Default Value  
Print mode  
00  
Print station selected  
User-defined/resident character sets  
Code page  
02  
01  
02  
Intercharacter spacing (SB)  
Rotated characters  
Station for line spacing  
Line spacing all stations  
Tab positions  
03  
00  
02  
Six LPI  
Every 100 dots  
Left margin  
Relative position  
Align positions  
Unidirectional printing  
Horizontal size of bar code  
Vertical size of bar code  
Position of HR  
00  
00  
00  
00  
03  
A2  
00  
00  
Font for HRI  
Error Conditions:  
None  
Enable or Disable the Feed Buttons (Models TI5 and TG5 Only)  
RS-485 Syntax:  
X'1B;63;35;n'  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC c 5 n or X'1B;63;35;n'  
where:  
n=0  
n=1  
Enables feed buttons  
Disables feed buttons  
Default:  
n = 0  
Purpose:  
To disable the feed buttons while in the middle of a transaction.  
Remarks:  
If the printer is set to have the buttons disabled, the offline tests will also be  
disabled.  
Enable or Disable the Beeper (Models TF7 and TM7 Only)  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC BEL n1 n2 or X'1B 07 n1 n2'  
where:  
n1  
Enables or disables beeper.  
X'00' Disable beeper.  
X'01'–X'FE'  
Timed enable beeper.  
X'FF' Enable beeper.  
138 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
n2  
Sets the beeper volume and tone.  
Bits 0–3  
The note. Bit 0 is the LSB.  
Bits 4–5  
The octave.  
Bits 6 Reserved.  
Bit 7 Volume. 0 = loud, 1 = soft.  
Value (Bits 0–3)  
Note  
Value (Bits  
Note  
Value (Bits  
Octave  
0–3)  
4–5)  
0000 – 0  
0001 – 1  
0010 – 2  
0011 – 3  
0100 – 4  
C
1000 – 8  
1001 – 9  
1010 – A  
1011 – B  
1100 – C  
G#  
A
00 – 0  
01 – 1  
10 – 2  
11 – 3  
1
2
3
4
C#  
D
A#  
B
D#  
E
Rest /  
Silence  
0101 – 5  
0110 – 6  
0111 – 7  
F
1101 – D  
1110 – E  
1111 – F  
Reserved  
Reserved  
F#  
G
1 KHz  
(normal  
beep)  
Default:  
n = X'00'  
Purpose:  
To enable or disable the beeper.  
Remarks:  
v Any value other than X'00' or X'FF' is treated as an amount of time that  
the beeper is to be enabled. The time is calculated as n1×0.1 seconds.  
v To stop a beep command early, send the Disable Beeper command.  
v Timed beeps can be chained together. They can also be downloaded as  
canned messages.  
v A value of n2=X'2F' is recommended for the most audible tone.  
Enable or Disable Upside-Down Printing  
This command is supported only for the thermal station.  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC { n or X'1B 7B n'  
where:  
n
Enables or disables upside-down printing.  
X'00' Disable upside-down printing.  
X'01' Enable upside-down printing.  
Default:  
n = 00  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Purpose:  
When the printer is wall-mounted, the front of the printer points up.  
Therefore, the print data appears upside down when data is printed  
normally. This command allows the data to be right-side up as it comes out  
of the printer.  
Remarks:  
v When upside-down printing is enabled, the last line of data must be sent  
to the print first.  
v This command is valid only at the beginning of a print line.  
Select Character Size for Scalable Fonts  
This command is supported only for the thermal station.  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS ! n or X'1D;21;n'  
where:  
n
Defines the height and width of a character. The four least  
significant bits (LSBs) specify the height and the four most  
significant bits (MSBs) specify the width of the character. See  
Table 17.  
For example, if n=X'14' the scaled character will be twice the  
defined width and five times the defined height.  
Table 17. Width and Height for Scalable Fonts  
Four MSBs (in  
hex)  
Character Width  
Four LSBs (in Character Height  
hex)  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
As defined  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
As defined  
2 × defined width  
3 × defined width  
4 × defined width  
5 × defined width  
6 × defined width  
7 × defined width  
8 × defined width  
2 × defined height  
3 × defined height  
4 × defined height  
5 × defined height  
6 × defined height  
7 × defined height  
8 × defined height  
Default:  
n = 00  
Purpose:  
To select the size of a character.  
Remarks:  
v This command is valid only in the thermal print station.  
v Bits 3 and 8 of n are ignored.  
v The Set Print Mode command (see “Set Print Mode” on page 125) can  
also select the character height (double high and double wide). The last  
command that is received is the effective command.  
140 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Fix Font Matrix  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC : n or X'1B 3A n'  
where:  
n
The character width to which all proportional characters will be  
adjusted. The range of valid values is 7<n<33. Use X'00' to disable  
this command and print proportional characters normally.  
Default:  
n = 00  
Purpose:  
To fix the matrix of proportional fonts. This command will be used mostly to  
align numbers and decimal points.  
Remarks:  
v This command is valid only on proportional user-defined fonts.  
v If the character is larger than the width defined by this command, then  
the right side of the character will be truncated.  
v If the character is smaller than the width defined by this command, then  
the character will be centered in the space.  
Print Logo Inline  
This command is supported only for the thermal station.  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS J d n1 n2 data or X'1D 4A d n1 n2 data'  
where:  
d
Relative height of the character.  
0
1
Single high  
Double high  
n1  
MSB of the logo width.  
n2  
LSB of the logo width.  
data  
The data to form the graphics image.  
Purpose:  
To print a small logo inline with characters.  
Remarks:  
v n1 and n2 indicate the number of dots of the bit image in the horizontal  
direction. The number of dots is calculated as n1×256+n2.  
v The logo is 24 dot rows high. If printed in double-high mode, the logo will  
be 48 rows high.  
v The number of data bytes to form the image is figured by  
{((n1×256+n2)−1)/8+1}×24.  
v Like user-defined characters, if the image is only 14 dots wide, the last  
two dots should be zero to complete the byte. When printed, the image  
will be only 14 dots wide.  
Enable or Disable Two-Color Printing  
This command is supported only for the thermal station.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS ; n or X'1D 3B n'  
where:  
n
X'0'  
X'1'  
Disable two-color printing.  
Enable color printing using print parameter set 1.  
X'2'–X'FF'  
Select the print parameters to be defined.  
Purpose:  
To enable two-color printing and select the print parameters that are best  
suited for the paper selected.  
Remarks:  
v New parameters will be defined as new color papers become available.  
v The speed of printing will change depending on the print parameters.  
When print parameter set 1 is used, the print speed will be 15 lines per  
second.  
Bar code commands are valid in the thermal print station only.  
Bar Code Commands  
Print Bar Code  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS k n NUL or X'1D6B;n;data'  
where:  
n
Barcode. Values are:  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
UPC-A  
UPC-E  
JAN13 (EAN-13)  
JAN8 (EAN-8)  
CODE 39  
ITF  
CODABAR  
CODE 128C  
CODE 93  
CODE 128A, 128B, and 128C (this command is supported  
only for Models TI3, TI4, TG3, TG4, TF6, and TM6)  
data  
For n=00 through n=08, the ASCII representation of the characters to be  
printed.  
For n=09, the hexadecimal representation of the characters to be printed.  
Remarks:  
v Valid at the beginning of a line only.  
142 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
v This command will increment status byte 6.  
|
|
v Printing will not start until X'00' is received, or the end of a data packet in  
RS-485.  
v Data after any invalid character for a particular bar code will be  
discarded. The printer will continue to wait for X'00'.  
v If X'00' or an invalid character is received before the required number of  
data bytes, zeros will be inserted following the data until the required  
number is reached (for UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN13, and JAN8).  
v Excess characters will be discarded.  
v A check digit will be generated if one is not supplied for UPC-A, JAN13,  
and JAN8.  
v Check digits will be figured and added for Code 128C and Code 93.  
v For UPC-E, the printer will expand the data, generate a check digit and  
parse the data before generating the bar code (6 or 7 digits are  
executed). If 7 digits are received and digit 1 is 0, the last 6 digits are  
used.  
If digit 1 is not 0, digit 1 is used and the digit 7 is ignored.  
v For CODABAR, a stop and start character is required.  
v A leading zero will be added to the data for ITF bar codes if the data  
received has an odd number of bytes.  
v If a bar code width is greater than the paper width, the right of the bar  
code is truncated, making the bar code unreadable.  
|
|
v Barcodes printed on the document station are printed at a dot density of  
150 dpi.  
|
|
v Barcodes will always be printed in black, regardless of color printing  
settings.  
v CR station must be selected. If the DI station is selected, the command  
is ignored and no error is reported.  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table 18. Code 128 character set  
Value  
Code  
Value  
Decimal  
Code  
Decimal  
Hex  
0
Set A  
Set B  
Set C  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
Hex  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
Set A  
Set B  
Set C  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
0
1
SP  
!
SP  
!
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
W
X
W
X
Y
Z
[
1
2
2
“
“
Y
3
3
#
$
%
&
‘
#
$
%
&
‘
Z
4
4
[
5
5
\
\
6
6
]
]
7
7
∧
∧
_
‘
8
8
(
(
_
9
9
)
)
MUL  
SOH  
STX  
ETX  
EOT  
ENO  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
A
B
C
D
E
*
*
a
b
c
d
e
+
‘
+
‘
12  
13  
14  
–
.
–
.
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table 18. Code 128 character set (continued)  
Value  
Decimal  
Code  
Set B  
/
Value  
Decimal  
Code  
Hex  
F
Set A  
/
Set C  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
Hex  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
5E  
5F  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
Set A  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
Set B  
Set C  
70  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
f
10  
11  
0
0
g
71  
1
1
h
72  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
2
2
HT  
i
73  
3
3
LF  
j
74  
4
4
VT  
k
75  
5
5
FF  
l
76  
6
6
CR  
m
77  
7
7
SO  
n
78  
8
8
SI  
o
79  
9
9
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
p
80  
:
:
q
81  
;
;
r
82  
<
<
s
83  
=
=
t
84  
>
>
u
85  
?
?
v
86  
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
w
87  
x
88  
y
89  
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
z
90  
{
|
91  
92  
GS  
}
93  
G
H
I
RS  
~
94  
US  
DEL  
FNC3  
FNC2  
SHIFT  
95  
FNC3  
FNC2  
SHIFT  
96  
J
J
97  
K
L
K
L
98  
CODE C CODE C  
99  
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
CODE B  
FNC4  
FNC4  
CODE B  
CODE A CODE A  
FNC1 FNC1  
FNC1  
START CODE A  
START CODE B  
START CODE C  
U
144 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
|
|
|
Table 18. Code 128 character set (continued)  
Value  
Decimal  
54  
Code  
Set B  
V
Value  
Decimal  
Code  
Set B  
Hex  
Set A  
Set C  
Hex  
Set A  
Set C  
|
|
36  
V
54  
Print Bar Code Examples  
UPC-A  
Command = 1D 6B  
n =  
Data =  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
30 33 31 33 32 33 31 32 30 37 38 (hex)  
UPC-E  
Command = 1D 6B  
n =  
Data =  
34 39 30 36 39 30 00 (hex)  
JAN13 (EAN-13)  
Command = 1D 6B  
n =  
Data =  
34 39 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 00 (hex)  
34 39 31 32 33 34 35 36 00 (hex)  
JAN8 (EAN-8)  
Command = 1D 6B  
n =  
Data =  
CODE 39  
Command = 1D 6B  
n =  
Data =  
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 00 (hex)  
ITF  
Command = 1D 6B  
n =  
Data =  
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 00 (hex)  
42 39 30 2E 2B 3A 2F 24 2D 43 00 (hex)  
35 34 35 35 35 36 35 37 35 38 35 39 00 (hex)  
31 32 33 34 35 36 00 (hex)  
CODABAR  
Command = 1D 6B  
n =  
Data =  
CODE 128C  
Command = 1D 6B  
n =  
Data =  
CODE 93  
Command = 1D 6B  
n =  
Data =  
Reserved  
09 - FF  
Select Horizontal Size of Bar Code  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS w n or X'1D77;n'  
where:  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
n
The horizontal magnification of the line width in the bar code, (2 ≤ n  
≤ 4).  
Default:  
n = 03  
Note: The last valid value is kept when an invalid value is sent.  
Select Bar Code Height  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS h n or X'1D68;n'  
where:  
n
The dot height of the bar code, (1 ≤ n ≤ 255).  
Default:  
n = X'A2' (162 decimal)  
Select Printing Position of Human Readable Information (HRI)  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS H n or X'1D48;n'  
where:  
n
The print position:  
00  
01  
02  
03  
Not Printed  
Above the bar code  
Below the bar code  
Both above and below the bar code.  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
Human readable information is normal text associated with the bar code.  
Note: The last valid value is kept when an invalid value is sent.  
Select Font for HRI  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS f n or X'1D66;n'  
where:  
n
The font for the HRI  
00  
01  
Font A  
Font B  
Default:  
n = 00  
Remarks:  
Only resident character sets are used:  
v Font A = 10-dots (W) × 20 dots (H) or 1.25 mm × 2.5 mm  
v Font B = 12-dots (W) × 24 dots (H) or 1.5 mm × 3.0 mm  
146 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Note: The last valid value is kept when an invalid value is sent.  
Print PDF417 Bar Code  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS P data NUL or X'1D;50;data;00'  
where:  
data  
Remarks:  
The ASCII representation of the characters to be printed.  
Valid only at the beginning of a line. Printing will not start until a X'00' is  
received.  
This command will increment status byte 6.  
The maximum number of characters to be encoded is 1000.  
Error Conditions:  
If an image cannot be printed, status byte 7, bit 2 will be set. This may  
happen when the image is too big to print. Try decreasing the ECC level.  
Select PDF417 ECC (Error Correction Codewords) Level  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS R n or X'1D;52;n1;n2'  
where:  
n1  
n2  
The high-order byte of the ECC level.  
The low-order byte of the ECC level.  
Default:  
n1 = 00  
n2 = 15  
Range:  
0 ≤ n1n2 ≤ 400 decimal (170 hex)  
Remarks:  
For 0 ≤ n1n2 ≤ 8, the ECC level is assumed as that particular security level.  
The security level determines the number of error correction codewords  
added to the symbol.  
Error Correction  
Security Level  
Codewords  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
6
14  
30  
62  
126  
254  
510  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
For 9 ≤ n1n2 ≤ 400, the ECC level is assumed as a percentage of  
the codewords in the bar code.  
Select Aspect Ratio PDF417 Bar Code  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS S r;c or X'1D;53;r;c'  
where:  
r
The height dimension for the ratio; 1 ≤ r ≤ 9.  
The width dimension for the ratio; 1 ≤ c ≤ 9.  
c
Default:  
r = 1, c = 2  
Remarks:  
This is not an exact ratio. The image will get as close as possible to the  
ratio. However, the maximum width of an image is 12 columns and the  
maximum height is 90 rows.  
Enable PDF417 Truncation  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS T n or X'1D;54;n'  
where:  
n
Whether to enable truncation.  
0 = Disable truncation.  
1 = Enable truncation.  
Default:  
n = 0  
Remarks:  
Truncated PDF generates a symbol with the right row indicator and stop  
pattern replaced by a single width bar. There is a slight degradation in  
decode performance if truncation is enabled, which allows more data to fit  
in the image width.  
Print Character Commands  
These commands should be sent after ASCII data is sent to the printer and is being  
held in the print buffer. Any of these commands will increment the line count by 1.  
(See “Status Byte 6” on page 162 and “Reset Line Count” on page 157.)  
Print and Line Feed  
RS-232 Syntax:  
LF or X'0A'  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper by a preset amount.  
148 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Print and Line Feed  
RS-232 Syntax:  
CR or X'0D'  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper by a preset amount.  
Remarks:  
There is an MCT to enable or disable this command. The default is to  
disable or ignore the CR command.  
Print, Form Feed, and Cut the Paper (FF)  
RS-232 Syntax:  
FF or X'0C'  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper in the customer receipt  
(CR) station or document insert (DI) station by a preset amount, until the  
document exits the feed rollers. If a cutter is available at the station (CR  
station only), it cuts the paper.  
Print and Feed Paper n lines  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC d n or X'1B64;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the number of line feeds.  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper by the amount specified  
in this command.  
Print and Feed Paper Using Minimum Units  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC J n or X'1B4A;n'  
where:  
n
Specifies the line feed steps.  
In the receipt station: 1 in. = 204 steps (1 mm = 8 steps).  
In the document portrait station: 1 in. = 48 steps (1 mm = 1.9  
steps).  
In the document landscape station: 1 in. = 127 steps (1 mm = 5  
steps).  
Purpose:  
Prints data in the print buffer and feeds the paper by the amount specified  
in this command.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Print Graphic Messages  
Select and Print a Graphics (Logo) Command  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC * d w h data or X'1B2A;d;w;h;data'  
where:  
d
Dot density.  
00  
01  
02  
Normal Print - 200 dpi in the receipt station, 150 dpi in the  
document station.  
Note: In the document station, this takes three passes of  
the printhead for a logo that is 8 dots high.  
Double wide - 100 dpi in the receipt station, 75 dpi in the  
document station.  
Note: In the document station, this takes one pass of the  
printhead for a logo that is 8 dots high.  
Double wide and high - 100 dpi in the receipt station, 75 dpi  
in the document station. Every dot row in the vertical  
direction will be printed twice.  
w
One-eighth the number of dots in the horizontal direction, (width = 8  
× w)  
1 ≤ w ≤ 72 for a thermal logo.  
1 ≤ w ≤ 59 for an impact logo.  
In the receipt station, 1 = 8 dots = 1 mm.  
In the document station, 6 = 48 dots = 1 inch.  
h
One-eighth the number of dots in the vertical direction, (height = 8  
× h).  
1 ≤ h ≤ 255 for a thermal logo.  
1 ≤ h ≤ 5 for an impact logo.  
data  
The data to form the graphics image.  
The number of data bytes for the image is (h × w) × 8. See  
“Download Graphics (Logo) Commands” on page 109 for an  
example of the data.  
Purpose:  
To print all-points-addressable print messages.  
Remarks:  
The margin will be ignored if this causes the logo to overrun the line length.  
These messages can be positioned on the page using the commands for  
setting positions.  
Not supported in document landscape mode.  
This command supports a total of 2000 bytes only. To print graphics on the  
Model TI5 printer when the data is greater than 2000 bytes:  
1. Hold the buffer.  
150 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
2. Send all the data.  
3. Release the buffer.  
The left margin will be rounded down to a factor of 8. For example, if the  
margin = 74, the logo starts at 72.  
Retries are not attempted on print errors.  
Valid at the beginning of the line only.  
When printing in the document station, a line feed command must be sent  
to advance the paper past the last line of the logo.  
If the parameter d, w, or h is out of the defined range for this command, the  
command is discarded and the remaining data is processed as print data.  
This command will increment status byte 6.  
If this message is printed on a regular basis, consider downloading it to  
save communication time. (See “Download Graphics (Logo) Commands” on  
page 109.)  
The data buffer in the Model TI3 and Model TI4, which is 16 KB, can be  
used for signature capture.  
Print Predefined Graphics (Logo) Command  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS / m logo_num or X'1D2F;m;logo_num'  
where:  
m
The dot-density:  
00  
01  
02  
Normal Print - 200 dpi in the receipt station, 150 dpi in the  
document station.  
Note: In the document station, this takes three passes of  
the printhead for a logo that is 8 dots high.  
Double wide - 100 dpi in the receipt station, 75 dpi in the  
document station.  
Note: In the document station, this takes one pass of the  
printhead for a logo that is 8 dots high.  
Double wide and high - 100 dpi in the receipt station, 75 dpi  
in the document station. Every dot row in the vertical  
direction will be printed twice.  
logo_num  
The number associated with the logo that is stored.  
1 ≤ logo_num ≤ 40  
Purpose:  
To print predefined all-points-addressable print messages.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Remarks:  
The margin is ignored if it causes the logo to overrun the line length.  
Printing this message in the document station at 150 dpi will take three  
passes of the printhead.  
These messages can be positioned on the page using the commands for  
setting positions.  
Valid at the beginning of the line only.  
This command is not valid in landscape mode.  
This command will increment status byte 6.  
Retries will not be attempted on print errors.  
In the document portrait station, a line feed command must be sent to  
advance the paper past the last line of the logo.  
See “Download Graphics (Logo) Commands” on page 109.  
Print Predefined Messages  
RS-232 Syntax:  
GS ^ message_num or X'1D5E;message_num'  
where:  
message_num  
The number associated with the stored predefined message.  
1 ≤ message_num ≤ 25  
Purpose:  
To print predefined print messages.  
Remarks:  
Valid at the beginning of the line only.  
Retries will not be attempted on print errors.  
Attention: Stored commands can increment status byte 6.See “Predefine  
Messages” on page 111.  
Miscellaneous Commands  
Tab to Next Tab Stop  
RS-232 Syntax:  
HT or X'09'  
Purpose:  
Moves the print position to the next tab stop.  
Remarks:  
See “Set Horizontal Tab Positions” on page 133.  
Tabs are valid when printing is aligned to the left only. If the tabs are used  
when alignment is not left, results can be unpredictable. (See “Align  
Positions” on page 134.)  
152 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Return Home (Select Printhead Location)  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC < n or X'1B3C;n'  
where:  
n
The print-head position:  
00  
01  
Document home position  
Open document throat position. The DI station throat will  
automatically be closed if the CR station is exercised.  
02  
03  
04  
Reserved  
Left home position  
Refined document home position. This can be used to  
recover from a home error.  
05  
Register document  
v Close throat if open  
v Advance paper forward to first position  
06-FF Reserved  
Purpose:  
To move the printhead to the desired location.  
Remarks:  
Valid at the beginning of the line only. Valid in impact print stations only.  
Paper Cut/DI Eject  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC i or ESC m or X'1B69 or 1B;6D'  
Purpose:  
To cut the paper in the customer receipt (CR) station.  
Remarks:  
v This command is the equivalent of a form feed (0C) in the document  
insert (DI) station but does not feed the customer receipt in the CR  
station.  
v ESC i or X'1B69' does not increment status byte 6.  
v ESC m or X'1B6D' does increment status byte 6.  
Generate Drive Pulse for Cash Drawer  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC p m n1 n2 or X'1B70;m;n1;n2'  
where:  
m
The cash drawer number - 0 or 1.  
Pulse width on time × 2 milliseconds.  
Pulse width off time × 2 milliseconds.  
n1  
n2  
Purpose:  
To open one of the cash drawers attached to the printer.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Remarks:  
Printing will be suspended while a cash drawer is being opened.  
Retrieve the Flash Storage  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC 4 m add or X'1B34;m;add'  
where:  
m
One-byte count of the bytes to be returned  
Three-byte address of the first byte to be returned  
add  
Purpose:  
Retrieve data from user flash storage.  
Remarks:  
One byte will be returned if a byte count of X'00' is specified.  
The valid address range for each SureMark depends on the model number  
and which memory option, if any, is installed. Use “Retrieve Size of User  
Flash Storage” to determine the valid address range for your printer.  
| Retrieve Size of User Flash Storage  
|
|
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC 4 x ’08 FF FF FF’ or X'1B;34;08;FF;FF;FF'  
|
|
Purpose:  
Retrieve the size of the user flash storage in the printer.  
|
|
|
Remarks:  
The size of the user flash storage will be returned in 8 bytes after the  
printer status bytes. The data will be in the form of ASCII decimal data.  
|
|
Models TI5 and TG5 have 296K bytes available, and should return a value  
of 303103.  
|
|
Models TF7 and TM7 have 813K bytes available, and should return a value  
of 826623.  
Retrieve Printer Usage Statistics  
RS-232 Syntax:  
X'1B 51 xx'  
where:  
xx  
Purpose:  
To send printer usage statistics from the printer to the host.  
Remarks:  
The hex value of the requested statistic. See Table 19 on page 155.  
v The usage statistics are sent over the serial line in status bytes 9 and 10.  
See Table 19 on page 155 for the values of parameter xx.  
Use this procedure to retrieve printer usage statistics from the printer:  
1. Reset the printer. (This is an optional step. It ensures that the most recent  
counts will be retrieved.)  
154 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
RS-232 Syntax:  
X'10 05 40'  
2. Execute the Retrieve Printer Usage Statistics command.  
3. Multiply the returned value by the factor given in Table 19 to get the actual  
printer statistic.  
Table 19. Retrievable Usage Data  
Hex Value  
Usage Data Being Tracked  
Factor  
80  
FRU Card/Invalid usage numbers (set to X'0164' at the  
factory, not set for FRU logic cards)  
N/A  
81  
82  
Number of paper cuts  
32  
High byte of the number of characters printed on the CR  
(thermal) station (see note 1)  
None  
83  
84  
Low byte of the number of characters printed on the CR  
(thermal) station (see note 1)  
None  
Number of steps performed by the CR paper feed motor  
(200 steps per inch of paper)  
50 000  
85  
86  
87  
Number of times the customer receipt cover was opened  
None  
None  
1 000  
Number of failed paper cuts – single-station printers only  
Number of characters printed at the DI (impact) station –  
thermal/impact printers only (see note 1)  
88  
89  
Number of steps performed by the DI paper feed motor –  
thermal/impact printers only  
50 000  
5 000  
None  
Number of DI transport motor starts – thermal/impact  
printers only  
8A  
8B  
Number of home errors – thermal/impact printers only  
Number of times the DI cover was opened – thermal/impact None  
printers only  
8C  
Number of forms that were inserted into the DI station –  
100  
thermal/impact printers only  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
Number of MICR reads – Model TI4 only  
15  
8
Number of high-interference MICR reads – Model TI4 only  
Number of failed MICR reads – Model TI4 only  
Number of check flips performed – Model TI4 only  
Number of check flip failures – Model TI4 only  
8
16  
8
Note 1: The number of printed characters is based on the number of dots that were printed,  
assuming 64 dots per character.  
Asynchronous (Real-Time) Commands  
These commands are processed as soon as they are received. They do not go into  
the printer buffer.  
Note: These commands are not recognized when they occur in the middle of  
another command. For example, sending this command after the second  
byte of a 3-byte command, as in ESC J n.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Real-Time Requests  
RS-232 Syntax:  
DLE ENQ m or X'1005:n'  
where:  
m
n
Specifies the ASCII command character  
Specifies the hexadecimal command character  
Description  
m
n
1
31  
Release the print buffer for printing. This should be sent  
after an error has occurred and the print buffer is held. If  
an error occurred during the transaction that was being  
held, the printer sends back the line number with the error  
and the error status. The system can then decide to cancel  
or continue printing after the error is corrected. The system  
uses this command to continue printing after the error is  
corrected.  
2
32  
Cancel print buffer. This clears the print buffer of all data.  
In RS-232 mode, the user must wait for buffer empty  
status (status byte 2, bit 6) before sending any more  
commands.  
Note: A status message is returned immediately after  
execution of this command.  
3
4
33  
34  
Undefined.  
EC request - transmit printer status. Sends the printer’s  
status to the system. This command does not go into the  
printer’s data buffer but is processed immediately.  
The printer status is returned in status bytes 1–8. See  
“Status Summary” on page 160 for more information.  
Status byte 5, bit 1, will be set after the EC request has  
been executed.  
5-8  
@
35-38  
40  
Undefined  
Reset the printer. The printer stops what it is doing and  
goes through its reset routine. The print buffer is canceled  
and all commands erased. All printer settings go back to  
default values.  
A
41  
Enable unsolicited status.  
Note: A status message is returned immediately after  
execution of this command.  
B
C
42  
43  
Disable unsolicited status  
Disable transparent XON/XOFF  
Purpose:  
To process a command immediately.  
Remarks:  
Either the Release print buffer or the Cancel print buffer command must be  
used in these situations:  
v When recovering from a cash receipt print error  
v After clearing an unrecoverable home error  
156 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
After the printer resets, it defaults to not sending status unless requested. If  
an error occurs, the printer appears hung, unless a status is requested. If  
unsolicited status is enabled, the printer sends the error to the system as  
soon as it occurs.  
Note: If transparent XON/OFF is disabled, X'10', X'11', and X'13' can be  
imbedded in returned status and data. (See “XON/XOFF Control” on  
page 24.) To re-enable the printer, the printer must be reset.  
Data Buffer Management and Batch Printing  
Reset Line Count  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC 6 or X'1B36'  
Purpose:  
Resetting the line count lets the system track the print line where an error  
occurs.  
Remarks:  
The line count is incremented at every print command. The count is sent in  
every status message to the system. The count can go to 256 (X'0FF'),  
when it rolls back to 0. (See “Print Character Commands” on page 148.)  
Disable Line Count  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC 8 n or X'1B;38'n  
Purpose:  
To temporarily not increment the line count. This can be used when printing  
predefined messages, if the number of lines embedded in the message is  
unknown.  
Hold Printing Until Buffer is Released  
RS-232 Syntax:  
ESC 7 or X'1B37'  
Purpose:  
If the system cannot send data to the printer at a speed needed to keep the  
printer in constant motion, it can hold the printer queue until it sends all  
data lines for a transaction.  
Remarks:  
The printer must be printing one line while processing the next line. If the  
printer is unable to completely process a line, the print speed reduces to  
half.  
The line count is reset when the buffer is held.  
Document Handling  
Use the side load capability for documents that must be positioned to begin printing  
at a particular location on the document. (There is an arrow on the side of the cover  
to indicate where printing begins.) Use front load for all other cases.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Portrait Mode  
This is a suggested way of document handling:  
1. ESC f (x) (y): Set up document wait time  
x
Time the printer should wait from receiving a print line for the  
document station until the document is inserted.  
If the document has not been detected by the time the wait time  
ends, a document error is sent to the system but the system  
continues to wait for a document to be inserted.  
y
Delay from the time the document is detected until it is grabbed by  
the printer (the start of document printing):  
v Side insertion - closes the document throat.  
v Front insertion - pulls the document into the printer and feeds it  
to the Top of Form.  
2. ESC c 0 X'04': Select document station - normal print mode:  
The document present indicator blinks until a document is detected, when it  
stays on continuously.  
v If the document is inserted from the front, it is fed to the first print  
position after the document wait time. Then commands in the printer  
buffer begin executing.  
v If the document is inserted from the side, printing starts at the location  
where it was inserted.  
The document throat must be open to insert the document from the side.  
Manually, open the throat by pressing and then releasing both buttons.  
You can also open it with these commands - ESC q or ESC < X'01'.  
If a document is not detected within the wait time (specified in the ESC f  
command), the printer sends error status to the system, and continues to  
wait.  
Note: The system can either cancel the print buffer, thereby deleting all  
data in the print buffer, or wait for a document to be inserted.  
The printer appears to be hung until an action is taken.  
3. Send print lines to be printed in this station.  
4. Final handling.  
You have an option on final handling, finish printing and either eject the  
document or open the document throat to allow manual removal of the  
document:  
4a. FF: Print and Eject Document.  
Finish printing and eject the document.  
4b. ESC q or ESC < X'01': Open Document Throat  
Finish printing and release the document from the printer’s rollers.  
Note: The document station stays selected - the printer will wait for  
another document until the station is changed.  
Landscape Mode  
Notes on landscape printing:  
v Lines you send to print start at the bottom of the form, against the right stop, and  
continue to the top of the form, to a maximum of 80 mm from the bottom of the  
158 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
form. This is because the bottom of the form is known (against the right stop)  
and the top of the form is unknown to the printer.  
v Different lengths of paper allow different print-line lengths. Therefore, the  
application must know the size of the print line.  
v The printer calculates the length of a document it is to print. To do that, it must  
feed the document up past the bottom sensor and back to the top sensor. (On a  
5-inch document this takes 2 seconds.)  
v When landscape mode is used, the document should be inserted so that the right  
edge is at the top of the printer, and the bottom edge is against the printer’s right  
wall.  
v To position the printing in landscape mode to the correct position, the system  
must send line feeds. The printer assumes that the top of form for a document in  
landscape mode is the far left edge of the document (to a maximum of 80 mm  
from the bottom of the form).  
v Line feeding is 5 steps per mm or 21 steps per line, at 6 lpi.  
v All landscape printing must be done with one printing pass. Therefore:  
– Double-high printing is not allowed.  
– User-defined characters greater than 9 dots high are not allowed.  
– DBCS characters are not allowed.  
v There is no error recovery for landscape printing.  
Landscape Printing Commands  
1. ESC f (x) (y): Set up document wait time  
Same as for portrait mode.  
2. ESC c 0 X'08': Select document station - landscape print mode:  
A
If the document was not previously loaded:  
v The document present indicator blinks until a document is  
detected.  
v Once detected, the document will be grabbed by the printer and  
fed to the right margin on the document. Because the document  
is inserted on its side, this is at the top of the printer.  
v If a document is not detected within the wait time (specified in  
the ESC f command), the printer sends error status to the  
system, and continues to wait.  
The system can either cancel the print buffer, deleting all data in  
the print buffer, or wait for a document to be inserted.  
The printer appears to be hung until an action is taken.  
B
If the document was previously loaded, the printer feeds the paper  
to the right margin on the document.  
3. Send print lines to be printed in this station.  
The number of characters that can be printed on a line depends on the  
width of the document. The print area is:  
v 63 mm high, starting 17 mm from the bottom of the document  
v The entire width of the document less 34 mm from the right edge and 10  
mm from the left edge  
4. Final handling.  
You have an option on final handling, finish printing and either eject the  
document or open the document throat to allow manual removal of the  
document:  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
4a. FF: Print and Eject Document.  
Finish printing and eject the document.  
4b. ESC q or ESC < X'01': Open Document Throat  
Finish printing and release the document from the printer’s rollers.  
Note: The document station stays selected. The printer will wait for  
another document until the station is changed.  
Status Summary  
Status is sent to the system for:  
v Cash receipt print error. The cover is open or out of paper.  
v Printer buffer empty. If enabled, see “Status Sent to System” on page 137.  
v Document sensor state changed. If enabled, see “Status Sent to System” on  
page 137.  
v Cash drawer sensor change. If enabled, see “Status Sent to System” on  
page 137.  
v Command has timed out. The printer is waiting for additional bytes to complete  
the command.  
v Nonrecoverable home error.  
v Document not inserted after document station was selected.  
v Document has exited sensor before document print is finished.  
v Flash EPROM load error.  
v Memory sector is full.  
v Flash storage is full.  
v Printer ID request (extended address command).  
v MCT read command.  
v Flash read command.  
v Print buffer being held.  
v Ribbon cover sensor change.  
v Document feed error.  
Message from the Printer  
A message from the printer has this format:  
Bytes Contents  
1 - 2 Data count (X'000A' to X'00FF'). The data count includes the two data-count  
bytes.  
3 - 10 Status bytes 1-8. See the descriptions of each byte in the sections that  
follow.  
11 - n Either 5 bytes of additional status from the “Extended Address Command –  
Request Printer ID” on page 107 command, or up to 246 bytes of user data  
that can include:  
v User flash data  
v MCT data  
Status Byte 1  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Command complete (immediate command and flash storage commands). Set  
to 1 when the command is complete, except for “Erase Flash EPROM Sector”  
on page 121, for which it is set to 1 when the command is sent. (See bit 7 of  
“Status Byte 3” on page 161.)  
160 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Bit  
Description  
1
Cash receipt right home position. Set to 1 when the printhead is in the  
customer receipt right home position.  
2
3
Left home position. Set to 1 when the printhead is in the left home position.  
Document right home position. Set to 1 when the printhead is in the document  
right home position.  
4
5
6
Reserved. Always 0.  
Ribbon cover open. Set to 1 when the ribbon cover is open.  
Cash receipt print error. Paper cover is open, the customer receipt station is out  
of paper, or the cutter is jammed in the closed position.  
7 (MSB)  
Command reject.  
Status Byte 2  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Document ready. Set to 0 when the document insert station is ready for  
printing. This occurs when both document sensors detect the document and the  
document has been fed to the first print position.  
1
2
Document present under the front sensor. Set to 0 when a document is under  
the front document sensor.  
Document present under the top sensor. Set to 0 when a document is under  
the top document sensor.  
3
4
Reserved. Always equals 1.  
Print buffer held. Set to 1 when the print buffer is being held. Cleared when  
buffer released.  
5
Open throat position. Set to 1 when the printhead is in the open throat position.  
Buffer empty. Set to 1 when no print data and no commands are in the buffer.  
Buffer Full. Set when only 1K bytes are available in the buffer.  
6
7 (MSB)  
Status Byte 3  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Memory sector is full.  
Home error.  
1
2
Document error. The document was not inserted after the document station  
was selected, and the wait subsequently timed out.  
3
4
5
6
Flash EPROM load error or MCT load error.  
Reserved. Always equals 0.  
User flash storage sector is full.  
Firmware error. CRC on the firmware failed. The printer is running out of the  
boot sector. Only system commands and firmware commands are accepted.  
7 (MSB)  
Command complete (“Erase Flash EPROM Sector” on page 121, and whenever  
a physical line is printed). Set to 1 when the command is complete or a  
physical line is printed.  
Appendix C. RS-232 Programming Information 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Status Byte 4  
Status Byte 5  
Contains the printer engineering code (EC) level with all status messages.  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Printer ID Request/Extended Address command. Set to 1 when responding to a  
Printer ID request.  
1
EC Level. Set to 1 when responding to an EC level request.  
2
Reserved.  
3
MCT Read. Set to 1 when responding to an MCT read command.  
4
User flash read. Set to 1 when responding to a flash read command.  
5
Reserved. Defaults to 1.  
Reserved.  
6
7 (MSB)  
Reserved.  
Status Byte 6  
Status Byte 7  
Contains the current line count.  
Bit  
Description  
0 (LSB)  
Reserved.  
1
Reserved.  
2
Reserved.  
3
Cash drawer status (0 if cash drawer status (port pin 3) at ground.  
Print key pressed (1 = pressed).  
4
5
Reserved. Defaults to 1.  
6
Station selected. Set to 1 when document insert station is selected.  
Reserved.  
7 (MSB)  
Status Byte 8  
Reserved for future use.  
162 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Appendix D. Uploading Electronic Journal Data  
This section describes the procedure for uploading electronic journal (EJ) data while  
the SureMark is in Model 4 emulation mode.  
To put the SureMark into the mode for starting the EJ upload, the SureMark must  
receive a print command with a unique message. The message will include the line  
number where the upload should start. Because the starting line number is  
specified, if the printer is reset during the upload, the application will not have to  
restart from the beginning. The application can send a command to start at the last  
line that was sent.  
When the EJ upload is enabled, all MICR commands will be interpreted as EJ  
upload.  
The commands that are related to uploading EJ data, which are described in the  
sections that follow, are:  
1. Enable the upload  
2. Disable the upload  
3. Upload the data  
4. Request the size of the EJ space  
5. Erase the EJ in the printer  
Enable the Upload of EJ Data  
Command Syntax:  
X'010100010C'^EJ RQ n1 n2  
where:  
n1  
n2  
The line number, which is specified as six decimal ASCII numbers.  
25 undefined bytes  
Example:  
X'010100010C'^EJ RQ 00405X'0000000000000000.....' or  
X'010100010C5E454A205251203030303430450000000000.....'  
Disable the Upload of EJ Data  
Command Syntax:  
X'010100010C'^EJ DIsable n1  
where:  
n1  
Example:  
X'010100010C5E454A204449..............'  
27 undefined bytes  
Upload the EJ Data  
Command Syntax:  
X'0117'  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Remarks:  
In response to this command, the printer will send four status bytes, then  
43 bytes of print data, followed by the line number.  
The line number will be sent as decimal ASCII numbers.  
Request the Size of the EJ Space  
Command Syntax:  
X'0101xxxxxx'^EJSIze n1  
where:  
n1  
Example:  
X'010100010C5E454A204449..............'  
Remarks:  
30 undefined bytes  
When the next MICR read command is sent after this command is sent, the  
SureMark will send the number of lines that are stored in the printer’s  
memory. It will also send the total number of lines that can be stored in the  
printer’s memory. The printer will then return to normal operation and  
process MICR commands as MICR commands.  
Erase the EJ Data in the Printer  
Command Syntax:  
X'0101xxxxxx'^EJERase n1  
where:  
n1  
30 undefined bytes  
164 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Appendix E. Proportional Fonts  
This section describes the procedure for converting and downloading proportional  
fonts. It also gives recommendations that will simplify implementing proportional  
fonts on a receipt.  
Preparing the Fonts  
Downloading proportional fonts to the SureMark is a 2-step process:  
1. Convert a TrueType font to the SureMark proportional font format. Use the IBM  
Font Converter program, fontconvert.exe, to convert the fonts.  
2. Download the converted font file to the printer.  
Implementing Proportional Fonts  
The variable width of proportional fonts can make it difficult to layout a receipt using  
traditional methods. You can simplify the process of laying out the format of a  
receipt by using the alignment and tab features of the SureMark printer.  
The following topics show how to use the alignment and tab features with  
proportional fonts. Command descriptions are given in RS-232 command format.  
For the command syntax when you use a printer driver, please consult the driver  
documentation.  
A single proportional character set requires two user-defined code pages.  
Therefore, the printer allows the following combination of user-defined and  
proportional character sets to be stored in the printer.  
Number of Proportional Character Sets Number of User-Defined Character Sets  
0
1
2
4
2
0
Selecting code page 2 when a proportional character set is defined for code page 1  
(or selecting code page 4 when proportional characters are defined in code page 3)  
will result in unreadable characters being printed. See the Select Print Mode  
command (“Set Print Mode” on page 125) for more information on selecting code  
pages.  
A proportional character set is enabled using the Select User-Defined Characters  
command. See “Select User-Defined or Resident Character Sets” on page 129.  
Layout Using Align Commands  
A common requirement for receipt layout includes aligning item prices. This is  
commonly accomplished using fixed field lengths for item descriptions or counting  
characters. Using proportional fonts makes this method of alignment practically  
impossible.  
The simplest method to align prices is to use the Align Column Right command  
(see “Align Positions” on page 134) with the Fix Font Matrix command (see “Fix  
Font Matrix” on page 141).  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
v Unlike other Align Position commands, the Align Positions-Align Column Right  
command can be sent in the middle of a print line. Print characters sent before  
the alignment command will be left aligned, while characters sent after the  
alignment command will be right aligned.  
v The Fix Font Matrix command forces proportional characters to print using a  
single width defined by the command. This essentially negates the proportional  
characteristic of the font, while still allowing the user to utilize the custom font.  
The following sequence assumes proportional characters have been downloaded  
and selected for printing. The following sequence should be used for each item line.  
The printer output would resemble the following:  
Candy Bar  
Fountain Soda  
$
.45  
$ 1.11  
1. Print the item description. For the first item, this is the ASCII data Candy Bar.  
2. Issue the Set Alignment command with n=4 (Right Align Column). The  
command syntax is X'1B 61 04'.  
3. Issue the Fix Font Matrix command with n=dot width of the widest number used.  
The command syntax is X'1B 3A xx'.  
Note: Finding the optimum value of xx for this command will vary depending on  
the proportional character set being used, and may require some  
experimentation.  
4. Print the item price. For the first item, this is the ASCII data $ .45.  
5. Issue the Fix Font Matrix command with n=0, which disables the fixed font  
matrix. The command syntax is X'1B 3A 00'.  
6. Issue the Print and Line Feed command. Use the command syntax X'0A' or  
X'0D'.  
Layout using Set Tab Position  
There are situations where the customer might not want the price right aligned, or  
requires an additional column (for example, a column for quantity). In such a case,  
using tabs is the best method to guarantee alignment. Tab positions that you define  
during the set-up operation (see “Set Horizontal Tab Positions” on page 133) will  
remain intact until the printer is reset or reinitialized. Once tabs are set-up, all that is  
required is to send a tab character X'09' to move to the next tab position. It is still  
recommended that the Fix Font Matrix be used, if alignment of the individual  
characters in a field is important (for example, to align the decimal points of prices).  
The following Set Tab Positions command will define tab positions for 3 columns:  
item description, quantity and price. The command assumes that the font width is  
approximately 10 dots. This procedure assumes that proportional characters have  
been downloaded and selected for printing, and that the item description will be left  
aligned.  
X'1B 44 01 90 01 D6 00 00'  
The following sequence should be used for each item line. The printer output would  
resemble the following:  
Candy Bar  
03 $ 1.00  
Fountain Soda 10 $11.10  
1. Print the item description. For the first item, this is the ASCII data Candy Bar.  
2. Issue the Tab command. The command syntax is X'09'.  
166 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
3. Issue the Fix Font Matrix command with n=dot width of the widest number used.  
The command syntax is X'1B 3A xx'.  
Note: Finding the optimum value of xx for this command will vary depending on  
the proportional character set being used, and may require some  
experimentation.  
4. Print the quantity. For the first item, this is the ASCII data 03.  
5. Issue the Tab command. The command syntax is X'09'.  
6. Print the price. For the first item, this is the ASCII data $1.00.  
7. Issue the Fix Font Matrix command with n=0, which disables the fixed font  
matrix. The command syntax is X'1B 3A 00'.  
8. Issue the Print and Line Feed command. Use the command syntax X'0A' or  
X'0D'.  
Appendix E. Proportional Fonts 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
168 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Appendix F. Emulation Support for Epson Single-Station  
Printer  
Commands Supported in Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Commands with Limited Support in Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Commands Not Supported in Emulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
Connectivity Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
The SureMark single-station printers in SBCS mode can emulate an Epson  
single-station printer. Emulation mode provides full support for most Epson  
commands. However, some commands are supported partially and a few  
commands are not supported at all. This section describes the commands that have  
each of the three levels of support and also lists the connectivity differences  
between an Epson single-station printer and the SureMark single-station printers.  
Commands Supported in Emulation Mode  
The commands listed in Table 20 are supported in Epson emulation mode.  
However, there will be some differences in the printed output, because of different  
dot pitches in the print heads and the minimum distance that the paper feed motors  
can move the paper. These differences will appear when there are a number of  
printed lines, and the method of aligning the data is different.  
Examples of the printed differences that might occur:  
v Logos will appear smaller in emulation mode. The logo will still contain the same  
number of dots in the width and height. However, because the SureMark print  
head has a finer dot pitch, the logo will appear smaller. If text is aligned around  
the logo, the text on receipts that are printed in emulation mode might not line up  
the same as receipts that are printed on the Epson printer.  
v If one line is aligned using spaces and another line is aligned using the relative  
position commands, the data might appear misaligned. The commands, such as  
the relative position and margin commands, that use the minimum unit of motion  
values are based on a fraction of an inch, which eliminates the differences in the  
dot pitch. Tabs and spaces are subject to pitch differences.  
Table 20. Commands Supported in Epson Emulation Mode  
Hex Command  
ASCII Command  
Description  
9
HT  
Tab  
0A  
0C  
0D  
LF  
Line feed  
FF  
Print and return to standard mode  
Print and carriage return  
Set right-side character spacing  
Select print mode  
CR  
1B 20 n  
ESC SP n  
ESC ! n  
ESC $ nL nH  
ESC % n  
1B 21 n  
1B 24 nL nH  
1B 25 n  
Set absolute print position  
Select or cancel user-defined character  
set  
1B 26 y c1 c2...  
ESC & y c1 c2...  
Define user-defined characters  
Select bit-image mode  
1B 2A m nL nH dl..k ESC * m nL nH dl...k  
1B 32  
ESC 2  
Select default line spacing  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Table 20. Commands Supported in Epson Emulation Mode (continued)  
Hex Command  
1B 33 n  
ASCII Command  
ESC 3 n  
ESC = n  
ESC ? n  
ESC @  
Description  
Set line spacing  
1B 3D n  
1B 3F n  
1B 40  
Set peripheral device  
Cancel user-defined characters  
Initialize printer  
1B 45 n  
1B 47 n  
1B 4A n  
1B 52 n  
1B 53  
ESC E n  
ESC G n  
ESC J n  
ESC R n  
ESC S  
Turn emphasized mode on or off  
Turn double-strike mode on or off  
Print and feed paper  
Select an international character set  
Select standard mode  
1B 56 n  
ESC V n  
Turn 90° clockwise rotation mode on or  
off  
1B 5C nL nH  
1B 61 n  
ESC \ nL nH  
ESC a n  
Set relative print position  
Select alignment  
1B 63 33 n  
ESC c 3 n  
Select paper sensor to output paper  
end signals  
1B 63 35 n  
1B 64 n  
ESC c 5 n  
ESC d n  
Enable or disable panel buttons  
Print and feed n lines  
Generate pulse  
1B 70 m t1 t2  
1B 7B n  
ESC p m t1 t2  
ESC { n  
Turn upside-down printing mode on or  
off  
1C 67 32 m a1 a2  
a3 a4...  
FS g 2 m a1 a2 a3 a4...  
Read from user NV memory  
1C 70 n m  
1D 21 n  
FS p n m  
GS ! n  
Print NV bit image  
Select character size  
1D 2A xydl ...d(x*y*8) GS * xydl ...d(x*y*8)  
Define user-defined bit image  
Print user-defined bit image  
Start or end user-defined message  
Turn white/black reverse printing mode  
1D 2F m  
1D 3A  
GS / m  
GS :  
1D 42 n  
1D 48 n  
GS B n  
GS H n  
Select printing position for HRI  
characters  
ID 49 n  
GS I n  
Transmit printer ID  
ID 4C nL nH  
1D 50 x y  
1D 56 m n  
ID 57 nL nH  
1D 61 n  
GS L nL nH  
GS P x y  
GS V m n  
GS nL nH  
GS a n  
Set left margin  
Set horizontal and vertical motion units  
Select cut mode and cut paper  
Set printing area width  
Enable or disable automatic status back  
Select font for HRI characters  
Select bar code height  
1D 66 n  
GS f n  
1D 68 n  
GS h n  
1D 72 n  
GS r n  
Transmit status  
170 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
Commands with Limited Support in Emulation Mode  
The commands listed in Table 21 are supported in a limited manner in Epson  
emulation mode. The table describes the limitation on each command.  
Table 21. Commands with Limited Support in Epson Emulation Mode  
Command  
Real-time status  
transmission  
Description of Limitation  
10 04 n  
A status byte will be returned when the  
command is sent. The following status  
bits will not be supported.  
v Offline status bit 6  
v Error status bits 5 and 6  
v Paper roll status bits 2 and 3 (near  
end of paper) - Bit will be set when  
out of paper  
1B 2D n  
Turn underline mode on/off There is no thickness option available.  
A value of n=1, 2, 49 or 50 will enable  
underline mode.  
1B 44 m1...nk 00  
1B 63 34 n  
Set horizontal tab positions The number of tab positions is limited  
to 5.  
Select paper sensor to stop The command will be accepted, but it  
printing  
has no function. There is no paper low  
sensor on the SureMark. The printer will  
only return out of paper status.  
1B 74 n  
Select character code table All characters on all code pages are not  
supported. The Katakana code page is  
not supported.  
1D 5E r t m  
1D 77 n  
Execute user-defined  
message  
Does not support the mode where the  
user-defined message is printed when  
the paper advance button is pressed.  
Set bar code width  
The maximum width is 4 dots on the  
SureMark. Widths of 5 and 6 will be  
forced to 4 dots.  
1C 67 31 m a1 a2  
a3 a4...  
Write to user NV memory  
If received during user-defined  
message definition, this command will  
be embedded in the NV memory. Epson  
will stop the definition and store the  
data in NV memory.  
The user is required to erase the NV  
memory before the address can be  
overwritten.  
1C 71 n [xL xH yL  
yH...  
Define NV bit image  
The width is limited to 576 dots wide  
and 255 rows high.  
Appendix F. Emulation Support for Epson Single-Station Printer 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Commands Not Supported in Emulation Mode  
In Epson emulation mode, the SureMark printer supports all Epson commands  
except the page mode commands and smoothing. Table 22 lists the commands that  
are not supported.  
Table 22. Commands Not Supported in Epson Emulation Mode  
Hex Command  
ASCII Command  
CAN  
Description of Limitation  
Cancel print data in page mode  
Print data in page mode  
18  
1B 0C  
1B 4C  
1B 54 n  
ESC FF  
ESC L  
Select page mode  
ESC T n  
Select print direction in page mode  
Set printing area in page mode  
1B 57 xL xH yL yH  
...  
ESC W xL xH yL yH...  
1D 24 nL nH  
1D 5C nL nH  
1D 62 n  
GS $ nL nH  
GS \ nL nH  
GS b n  
Set absolute vertical print position in  
page mode  
Set relative vertical print position in  
page mode  
Turn smoothing mode on or off  
Connectivity Differences  
The connectivity differences between an Epson single-station printer and the  
SureMark single-station printers are:  
v The Epson printer offers a parallel interface that the SureMark printer does not  
support.  
v The following RS-232 modes of communication, which are supported by the  
Epson single-station printer, are not supported by the SureMark printer:  
– 2.4K and 4.8K baud  
– 7 bits of data  
– Parity  
– More than one stop bit  
– 25-pin D shell  
v To attach the printer to a standard PC serial port:  
– The Epson single-station printer requires a Null Modem cable.  
– The SureMark requires a standard 9-pin D-shell RS-232 cable.  
172 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Appendix G. Notices  
References in this publication to IBM products, programs, or services do not imply  
that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates. Any  
reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply  
that only IBM’s product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally  
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any of IBM’s  
intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program, or  
service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products,  
except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user’s responsibility.  
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this  
document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these  
patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:  
IBM Director of Licensing,  
IBM Corporation,  
North Castle Drive  
Armonk, NY 10504-1785  
U.S.A.  
Electronic Emission Notices  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A  
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is  
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at  
his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to  
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television  
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by  
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or  
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité aux normes d’Industrie Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conformà la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
European Union (EU) Mark of Conformity Statement  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council  
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States  
relating to electromagnetic compatibility.  
IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection  
requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product,  
including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A  
Information Technology Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN  
55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial  
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed  
communication equipment.  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die  
elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) vom 30. August 1995  
(bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 89/336)  
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das  
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.  
Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die  
IBM Deutschland Informations systeme GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart.  
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 3 Abs. (2) 2:  
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 50082-1 und EN 55022 Klasse  
A.  
EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:  
″Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im  
Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber  
verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür  
aufzukommen.″  
EN 50082-1 Hinweis:  
″Wird dieses Gerät in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben (wie in EN 50082-2  
festgelegt), dann kann es dabei eventuell gestört werden. In solch einem Fall ist der  
Abstand bzw. die Abschirmung zu der industriellen Störquelle zu vergrößern.″  
Anmerkung:  
Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den IBM  
Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.  
174 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Statement  
This product is a Class A Information Technology Equipment and conforms to the  
standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Technology  
Equipment (VCCI). In a domestic environment this product may cause radio  
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
Korean Communications Statement  
Please note that this device has been certified for business purposes with regard to  
electromagnetic interference. If you find this is not suitable for your use, you may  
exchange it for one of residential use.  
Chinese Class A warning statement  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Taiwanese Class A Warning Statement  
Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference in which case the user will be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Appendix G. Notices 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Australia / New Zealand Compliance Statement  
Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may  
cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate  
measures.  
Trademarks  
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or  
other countries or both:  
IBM  
SureMark  
OS/2  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows 95 logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks  
of others.  
176 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
Index  
consumable supplies 73  
controls, printer  
models TF7 and TM7 63  
models TI5 and TG5 47  
conversion utility, proportional fonts 43  
Numerics  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette 31  
4610CVNT.EXE program 34  
A
AIP46MC5.HEX file 37  
AIPFNT46.EXE program 35  
align positions command 134  
D
data buffer management command 157  
data buffer management commands  
disable line count 157  
hold printing 157  
application program requirements  
asynchronous commands 155  
9
reset line count 157  
DBCS address vectors 125  
DBCS code page  
B
bar code commands  
enable PDF417 truncation 148  
print bar code 142  
print PDF417 bar code 147  
available DBCS 10  
download 31  
font files 33  
UDC font files 36  
select aspect ratio PDF417 bar code 148  
select bar code height 146  
select font for HRI 146  
DBCS code page download  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette 31  
POSS for Windows 33  
DBCS user-defined character download 35  
define document wait time command 136  
select horizontal size of bar code 145  
select PDF417 ECC level 147  
select printing position of HRI 146  
bar codes, supported 10  
batch printing command 157  
baud rate selection, RS-232 23  
dimensions, physical  
7
disable feed buttons 138  
disable line count command 157  
disable the beeper 138  
disable two-color printing 141  
disable upside-down printing 139  
diskettes  
C
cancel high quality print mode 128  
cash drawer drive pulse command 153  
cash drawer pin assignments 80  
changing printer mode, DBCS to SBCS 42  
character fonts 93  
related  
x
document handling  
landscape mode 158  
portrait mode 158  
document insert forms 74  
cleaning  
double-high mode command, set or cancel 127  
double-wide mode command, set or cancel 126  
download DBCS code page  
thermal printhead (models TF7 and TM7) 66  
thermal printhead (Models TI5 and TG5) 53  
code page  
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette 31  
POSS for Windows 33  
code page 1381 92  
code page 437 84  
code page 858 85  
code page 860 86  
code page 863 87  
download double-byte characters command 117  
download graphics (logo) commands 109  
download user-defined characters command 112  
DTR and DSR  
code page 865 88  
control description 23  
code page 932 89  
selection 23  
code page 949 90  
code page 950 91  
generic 83  
resident 82  
resident SBCS  
E
EC request command 156  
9
electronic emission notices 173  
electronic journal data, upload during emulation 163  
emphasized printing command, set or cancel 128  
emptying printer buffer 41  
emulating Epson single-station printer  
commands with limited support 171  
code page command, set 129  
commands, immediate 79  
communication interfaces  
communication mode selection  
RS-232 23  
6
USB 25  
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1999,2001  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
updated March 18, 2002  
emulating Epson single-station printer (continued)  
connectivity differences 172  
enabling 42  
I
immediate commands 79  
impact code page 116  
indicators, printer  
fully-supported commands 169  
limitations 42  
overview 41  
models TF7 and TM7 63  
models TI5 and TG5 47  
unsupported commands 172  
emulating Mod 3 or 4 printer  
enabling with 4610 DBCS Installation Utility  
Diskette 39  
information, planning  
installation, Model TI5  
5
fillers for USB printers 21  
for RS-232/RS-485 communication 12  
for USB communication 15  
power-on self-test, models TI5 and TG5 55  
preparation 11  
problem determination, Models TI5 and TG5 59  
testing, Models TI5 and TG5 55  
unpacking 11  
enabling with 4690 On-Line Terminal  
Diagnostics 40  
limitations 40  
upload electronic journal data 163  
enable feed buttons 138  
enable the beeper 138  
enable two-color printing 141  
enable upside-down printing 139  
erase flash EPROM sector command 121  
error recovery command, set 135  
exercise program command 107  
extended address command 107  
installation, models TF7 and TM7  
power-on self-test, models TF7 and TM7 67  
problem determination, models TF7 and TM7 70  
testing, models TF7 and TM7 67  
installing filler  
for RS-232/RS-485 printer 19  
introduction  
3
invert command, set or cancel 127  
F
feed paper using minimum units command 149  
fillers, installing  
L
for RS-232/RS-485 printers 19  
for USB printers 21  
firmware, updating  
landscape printing commands 159  
left margin command, set 133  
limitations  
6
4610 DBCS Installation Utility Diskette 36  
4690 OS utility program 38  
limitation 39  
line spacing, minimum units 132  
line spacing, select 1/6 131  
line spacing, select 1/8 131  
POSS for Windows 37  
via RS-232 attachment 38  
fix font matrix 141  
M
flash memory  
memory units 79  
printing 41  
microcode tolerance (MCT)  
loading command 122  
request command 123  
miscellaneous commands  
generate drive pulse for cash drawer 153  
paper cut/DI eject 153  
retrieve flash storage 154  
retrieve size of user flash storage 154  
select printhead location 153  
tab to next tab 152  
usage 79  
flash storage write command 121  
fonts  
character 93  
files for DBCS code pages 33  
impact printing 94  
thermal printing 93  
UDC files for DBCS code pages 36  
fonts, character 93  
form feed, and cut command 149  
model description  
4
multipart form specifications 75  
G
general description 77  
generic code page 83  
N
notices  
electronic emission 173  
FCC statement 173  
safety information xi  
H
hardware requirements  
8
hold printing command 157  
horizontal tabs command, set 133  
humidity requirements  
7
178 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
printer, models TF7 and TM7  
indicators and controls 63  
operation 63  
O
offline test, model TI5  
customer receipt test 56  
document insert test 56  
offline test, models TF7 and TM7  
customer receipt 68  
test pattern 69  
paper loading 63  
printhead cleaning, thermal  
models TF7 and TM7 66  
Models TI5 and TG5 53  
printing flash memory 41  
printing saved data 41  
problem determination, model TI5  
customer receipt test 56  
messages 59  
onetime-set commands 109  
operating system requirements  
overline mode command, set or cancel 127  
9
overview  
3
symptoms 59  
problem determination, models TF7 and TM7  
customer receipt test 68  
symptoms 70  
programming information 100  
proportional font command 114  
proportional fonts  
conversion utility 43  
implementing 165  
layout using alignment 165  
layout using tabs 166  
publications  
P
paper specifications 73  
paper width 77  
parameters, serial RS-485 80  
physical dimensions  
pin assignments  
7
cash drawer connector 80  
RS-232 connector 80  
USB connector 81  
planning information  
power requirements  
predefine messages command 111  
predefined messages command 152  
preset commands  
5
8
CD-ROM  
Web site  
x
x
publications, related  
x
DBCS address vectors 125  
download double-byte characters 117  
download graphics (logo) 109  
download user-defined characters 112  
erase flash EPROM sector 121  
flash storage write 121  
MCT information – loading 122  
MCT information – request 123  
predefine messages 111  
R
real-time commands 155  
real-time status request command 156  
reinitialize the printer command 137  
related publications and diskettes  
relative position command, set 134  
release print buffer command 156  
request printer ID command 107  
requirements  
x
proportional font 114  
send checksum of flash EPROM sector 122  
print and feed n lines command 149  
print and line feed command (CR) 149  
print and line feed command (LF) 148  
print character commands 148  
print head cleaning, thermal head 53  
print logo inline 141  
print mode command, set 125  
print predefined graphics (logo) command 151  
print station command, set 128  
print station parameters command, set 130  
print width 77  
application programs  
9
hardware  
humidity  
8
7
operating system  
power  
software  
temperature  
9
8
9
7
reset line count command 157  
reset printer 156  
resetting the printer  
models TF7 and TM7 70  
Models TI5 and TG5 59  
printer, model TI5  
resident SBCS code pages  
9
indicators and controls 47  
installing for RS-232/RS-485 12  
installing for USB 15  
installing RS-232/RS-485 fillers 19  
installing USB fillers 21  
operation 47  
paper loading 51  
ribbon loading 49  
ribbon specifications 75  
Retail Store Solutions Web site 43  
retrieve flash storage command 154  
retrieve flash storage size command 154  
retrieve printer usage statistics command 154  
ribbon loading 49  
ribbons, print 75  
rotated characters command, set or cancel 130  
RS-232 commands 100  
1/6-in. line spacing, select 131  
1/8-in. line spacing, select 131  
Index 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
RS-232 commands (continued)  
align positions 134  
RS-232 commands (continued)  
retrieve flash storage size 154  
retrieve printer usage statistics 154  
RS-232 parameters 81  
asynchronous 155  
batch printing 157  
character for reprinted line, select 137  
data buffer management 157  
define document wait time 136  
disable line count 157  
document handling 157  
download double-byte characters 117  
download graphics (logo) 109  
download user-defined characters 112  
EC request 156  
select and print logo 150  
select aspect ratio PDF417 bar code 148  
select character sets 129  
Select Character Size for Scalable Fonts 140  
select color printing 132  
select PDF417 ECC level 147  
send checksum flash EPROM sector 122  
send status to system 137  
set bar code height 146  
emphasized printing, set or cancel 128  
enable or disable the beeper 138  
enable or disable two-color printing 141  
enable or disable upside-down printing 139  
enable PDF417 truncation 148  
erase flash EPROM sector 121  
exercise program 107  
set bar code horizontal size 145  
set code page 129  
set error recovery 135  
set horizontal tabs 133  
set inter-character spacing 129  
set inter-character spacing – DBCS 130  
set left margin 133  
extended address command 107  
feed buttons 138  
feed minimum units 149  
feed n lines 149  
fix font matrix 141  
flash storage write 121  
set or cancel double-high mode 127  
set or cancel double-wide mode 126  
set or cancel invert 127  
set or cancel overline mode 127  
set or cancel rotated characters 130  
set or cancel underline mode 127  
set relative position 134  
form feed and cut 149  
generate drive pulse for cash drawer 153  
high quality print mode 128  
hold printing 157  
set sheet eject length 133  
setup 125  
station parameters 130  
impact code page 116  
status byte 1 160  
landscape printing 159  
status byte 2 161  
line spacing, minimum units 132  
microcode tolerance, loading 122  
microcode tolerance, request 123  
onetime-set 109  
status byte 3 161  
status byte 4 162  
status byte 5 162  
status byte 6 162  
paper cut/DI eject 153  
status byte 8 162  
predefine messages 111  
preset 109  
status request 107  
status summary 160  
print and line feed (CR) 149  
print and line feed (LF) 148  
print bar code 142  
print character 148  
print font, select HRI 146  
print logo inline 141  
tab to next tab 152  
thermal code page 113  
unidirectional printing, set or cancel 135  
verify previous commands completed 107  
RS-232 communication mode selections 23  
RS-232 pin assignments 80  
RS-485  
print mode, set 125  
print PDF417 bar code 147  
print position, select HRI 146  
print predefined logo 151  
print predefined messages 152  
print station, set 128  
printhead home position, select 153  
proportional font 114  
real-time request 156  
real-time status request 156  
reinitialize 137  
release print buffer 156  
request ID 107  
reset 156  
reset line count 157  
parameters, serial 80  
S
saved data, printing 41  
select  
1/6-in. line spacing, select 131  
1/8-in. line spacing command 131  
character for reprinted line command 137  
character sets command 129  
HRI (bar code) font 146  
HRI (bar code) position 146  
print graphics (logo) command 150  
select printhead home position command 153  
Select Character Size for Scalable Fonts 140  
retrieve flash storage 154  
180 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
select color printing command 132  
send checksum flash EPROM sector command 122  
send status to system command 137  
set high quality print mode 128  
set horizontal tabs command 133  
set inter-character spacing – DBCS command 130  
set inter-character spacing command 129  
setup commands  
specifications (continued)  
paper width 77  
pitch 77  
print ribbons 75  
print width 77  
RS-232 pins 80  
RS-485 serial I/O 80  
single form 75  
align positions 134  
speed 77  
define document wait time 136  
enable or disable the beeper 138  
enable or disable the feed buttons (models TI5 and  
TG5) 138  
thermal paper 73  
USB pins 81  
speed, print 77  
status  
enable or disable two-color printing 141  
enable or disable upside-down printing 139  
fix font matrix 141  
print logo inline 141  
reinitialize the printer 137  
select 1/6–inch line spacing 131  
select 1/8–inch line spacing 131  
select character for reprinted lines 137  
select character size for scalable fonts 140  
select color printing 132  
request 107  
summary 160  
status byte 1 160  
status byte 2 161  
status byte 3 161  
status byte 4 162  
status byte 5 162  
status byte 6 162  
status byte 8 162  
status request command 107  
supplies, where to order 73  
system commands  
exercise program 107  
extended address command 107  
request printer ID 107  
status request 107  
verify previous commands completed 107  
select user-defined or resident character set 129  
set code page 129  
set error recovery function 135  
set horizontal tab positions 133  
set inter-character spacing 129  
set inter-character spacing – DBCS 130  
set left margin position 133  
set line spacing using minimum units 132  
set or cancel double-high mode 127  
set or cancel double-wide mode 126  
set or cancel emphasized printing 128  
set or cancel high quality print mode 128  
set or cancel invert mode 127  
set or cancel overline mode 127  
set or cancel rotated characters 130  
set or cancel underline mode 127  
set or cancel unidirectional printing 135  
set print mode 125  
T
tab to next tab stop command 152  
technical information 77  
temperature requirements  
testing the SureMark  
models TF7 and TM7 67  
Models TI5 and TG5 55  
thermal code page 113  
thermal paper specifications 73  
trademarks 176  
TrueType fonts conversion utility 43  
7
set print station 128  
set print station parameters 130  
set relative position 134  
set sheet eject length 133  
status sent to system 137  
sheet eject length command, set 133  
single form specifications 75  
U
UDC font file names 36  
underline mode command, set or cancel 127  
unidirectional printing command, set or cancel 135  
unpacking the printer 11  
upload electronic journal data during emulation 163  
USB communication mode 25  
USB pin assignments 81  
software adjustments  
updating firmware 36  
using 4690 operating system 27  
using POS Device Diagnostics 28  
using reference/service diskette 28  
software requirements  
specifications  
9
cash drawer pins 80  
document insert forms 74  
fonts 93  
V
verify previous commands completed 107  
voltage conversion circuitry 79  
memory 79  
multipart forms 75  
paper 73  
Index 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
updated March 18, 2002  
W
wall mounting feature, single-station printers 18  
where to order supplies 73  
X
XON and XOFF  
control description 24  
selection 23  
182 SureMark DBCS User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
SureMark Printers  
DBCS User’s Guide  
Publication No. GA27-4256-00  
Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?  
Very Satisfied  
h
Satisfied  
h
Neutral  
h
Dissatisfied  
h
Very Dissatisfied  
h
Overall satisfaction  
How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:  
Very Satisfied  
Satisfied  
Neutral  
h
Dissatisfied  
Very Dissatisfied  
Accurate  
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
Complete  
h
Easy to find  
h
Easy to understand  
Well organized  
Applicable to your tasks  
h
h
h
Please tell us how we can improve this book:  
Thank you for your responses. May we contact you?  
h Yes  
h No  
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any  
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
Name  
Address  
Company or Organization  
Phone No.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
GA27-4256-00  
ꢀꢁꢂꢃ  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
NO POSTAGE  
NECESSARY  
IF MAILED IN THE  
UNITED STATES  
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL  
FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK  
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE  
IBM Corporation  
Design and Information Development  
Dept CJMA/Bldg. 645  
P. O. Box 12195  
RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK NC  
27709-9990  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
GA27-4256-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ꢀꢁꢂꢃ  
Part Number: 16K8663  
updated March 18, 2002  
Printed in the United States of America  
on recycled paper containing 10%  
recovered post-consumer fiber.  
GA27-4256-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grizzly Dust Collector G1028Z G1029Z User Manual
Grizzly Saw G1022PROZX User Manual
Haier Microwave Oven HGN 36100EB User Manual
Hamilton Beach Kitchen Grill 840058500 User Manual
Hamilton Beach Oven 32180C User Manual
Healthrider Treadmill HRTL14911 User Manual
Hotpoint Electric Pressure Cooker EW31 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Personal Computer 5 xxx Series 5 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Tablet F4C56UAABA User Manual
Hypertec Carrying Case N13268PHY User Manual